You are on page 1of 339

Contents Owner's Manual for

Vehicle

A-Z The Ultimate Driving


Machine

THE BMW X6.


OWNER'S MANUAL.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500


X5 xDrive35i Owner's Manual for Vehicle
X5 xDrive50i Thank you for choosing a BMW.
X5 xDrive35d The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you
will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
X6 xDrive35i
X6 xDrive50i Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
It contains important information on vehicle operation that will
X5 M help you make full use of the technical features available in your
X6 M BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Please also note the additional items of onboard literature, for in‐
stance the BMW X5 M / BMW X6 M Supplementary Owner's
Manual.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500


© 2012 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English II/12, 03 12 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500


Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Communication
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 230 Telephone
page 324. 242 Office
251 Contacts
253 ConnectedDrive
6 Notes
Mobility
At a glance
262 Refueling
12 Cockpit
264 Fuel
18 iDrive
269 Wheels and tires
25 Voice activation system
281 Engine compartment
Controls 286 Maintenance
30 Opening and closing 288 Replacing components
48 Adjusting 300 Breakdown assistance
60 Transporting children safely 305 Care
66 Driving
Reference
77 Displays
312 Technical data
88 Lamps
316 Short commands for voice activation
93 Safety
system
103 Driving stability control systems
324 Everything from A to Z
109 Driving comfort
127 Climate
135 Interior equipment
143 Storage compartments

Driving tips
152 Things to remember when driving

Navigation
162 Navigation system
164 Destination entry
173 Destination guidance
181 What to do if...

Entertainment
184 Tone
186 Radio
194 CD/multimedia
215 DVD system in rear

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500


Notes

Notes
Using this Owner's Manual scribes and depicts equipment that may not be
contained in your vehicle because of the se‐
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ lected special equipment or country version, for
ular topic is by using the index. example.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in This also applies to safety-related functions and
the first chapter. systems.
For options and equipment not described in this
Additional sources of information
Owner's Manual, please refer to the Supple‐
Should you have any questions, your service mentary Owner's Manuals.
center will be glad to advise you at any time.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is arranged differently than shown in the illustra‐
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com tions.

Symbols Status of this Owner's Manual


Indicates precautions that must be followed at time of printing
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per‐
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.
icy of constant development that is conceived
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐ to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody
tion. the highest quality and safety standards. In rare
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐ cases, therefore, the features described in this
lect individual functions. Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐ vehicle.
tivation system.
Updates made after the editorial
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
deadline
voice activation system.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for
Refers to measures that can be taken to help the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen‐
protect the environment. dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.

Symbols on vehicle components


Indicates that you should consult the rele‐ For your own safety
vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor‐
mation on a particular part or assembly. Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics, re‐
Vehicle equipment quires suitable maintenance and repair meth‐
This Owner's Manual describes all models, all ods.
series equipment, as well as country-specific Therefore, have this work performed only by a
and special equipment offered in the model ser‐ BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
ies.Therefore, this Owner's Manual also de‐

6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Notes

ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐ California Proposition 65 Warning


ately trained personnel. California laws require us to state the following
If this work is not carried out properly, there is warning:
the danger of subsequent damage and related Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile
safety hazards. components and parts, including components
found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, con‐
Parts and accessories tain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cal‐
For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac‐ ifornia to cause cancer and birth defects and re‐
cessories approved by BMW. When you pur‐ productive harm. In addition, certain fluids
chase accessories tested and approved by contained in vehicles and certain products of
BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane‐ component wear contain or emit chemicals
ously acquire the assurance that they have been known to the State of California to cause cancer
thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
performance when installed on your vehicle. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
BMW warrants these parts to be free from de‐ contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
fects in material and workmanship. BMW will not hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
accept any liability for damage resulting from in‐ chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
stallation of parts and accessories not approved animals. Always protect your skin by washing
by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made thoroughly with soap and water.
by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used
on a BMW safely and without risk to either the Service and warranty
vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine We recommend that you read this publication
BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other prod‐ thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
ucts approved by BMW, together with profes‐ lowing warranties:
sional advice on using these items, are available ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty
from all BMW centers. Installation and operation
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
of non-BMW approved accessories such as
alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
wheels, suspension components, brake dust ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
shields, telephones, including operation of any ▷ California Emission Control System Limited
mobile phone from within the vehicle without Warranty
using an externally mounted antenna, or trans‐
ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie- Detailed information about these warranties is
talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may listed in the Service and Warranty Information
cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com‐ Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
electrical system or affect the validity of the Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center designed to meet the particular operating con‐
for additional information. Maintenance, re‐ ditions and homologation requirements in your
placement, or repair of the emission control de‐ country and continental region in order to deliver
vices and systems may be performed by any au‐ the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is op‐
tomotive repair establishment or individual erated under those conditions. If you wish to op‐
using any certified automotive part. erate your vehicle in another country or region,
you may be required to adapt your vehicle to
meet different prevailing operating conditions
and homologation requirements. You should

7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Notes

also be aware of any applicable warranty limita‐ To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
tions or exclusions for such country or region. In Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
such case, please contact Customer Relations (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐
for further information. rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
Maintenance You can also obtain other information about mo‐
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
safety, operational reliability and the New Vehi‐
cle Limited Warranty. For Canadian customers
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ Canadian customers who wish to report a
ures: safety- related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
▷ BMW Maintenance system
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet also obtain other information about motor vehi‐
for US models cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov‐
ered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited War‐
ranty.

Reporting safety defects


For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.

8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Notes

9
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500


At a glance Cockpit

Cockpit
Vehicle equipment describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
This chapter describes all series equipment as special equipment or the country version. This
well as country-specific and special equipment also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also tems.

All around the steering wheel

1 Rear window safety switch  44 Instrument lighting  92


2 Power windows  43
3 Exterior mirror operation  57 Front fog lamps  91
4 Lamps

12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Cockpit At a glance

Parking lamps  88 Windshield wipers  72

Low beams  88 Rain sensor  72

Automatic headlamp con‐ BMW X5: rear window wip‐


trol  89 ers  73
Adaptive light control  89
10 Start/stop the engine and switch
High-beam Assistant  90
the ignition on/off  66
5 Head-up Display  125
11 Ignition lock  66
12 Steering wheel buttons, right
6 Steering column stalk, left
Change the radio station
Turn signal  71
Stopping a traffic announcement
Select a music track
High beams, head‐ Scrolling through the redial list
lamp flasher  90
Next entertainment source
High-beam Assistant  90

Recirculated-air mode  130
Roadside parking lamps  90

Steering wheel heating  59


Computer  79

Lane departure warning  100


Settings and information about the
vehicle  77
13 Horn, the entire surface
7 BMW X6: shifting up or down with automatic
transmission  74 14

8 Instrument cluster  14
9 Steering column stalk, right 15 Cruise control lever
Cruise control  116

Active cruise control  109

16 Steering wheel buttons, left

13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
At a glance Cockpit

Telephone  230 17 Releasing the hood  282

Volume

Activate/deactivate the voice acti‐


vation system  25

Instrument cluster

1 Turn signal indicator lamp ▷ Indicator/warning lamps  15


2 Speedometer ▷ Cruise control  116
3 Indicator/warning lamps  15 ▷ Active Cruise Control  109
4 Active Cruise Control  109 ▷ BMW X5: reserve display for diesel ex‐
5 Tachometer  78 haust fluid  265

6 BMW X5: current fuel consumption  78 8 Display for

BMW X6: engine oil temperature  78 or ▷ Automatic transmission position  74


current fuel consumption  78 ▷ HDC Hill Descent Control  106
7 Display for ▷ Computer  79
▷ Clock  77 ▷ Date of next scheduled service, and re‐
▷ External temperature  77 maining distance to be driven  81

14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Cockpit At a glance

▷ Odometer and trip odometer  77 ▷ Adaptive Drive: sport chassis and sus‐
▷ High-beam Assistant  90 pension tuning  107

▷ Check Control message 9 Fuel gauge  79


present  83 10 Resetting the trip odometer  77
Viewing service requirement display  78

Indicator/warning lamps In urgent cases, this information will be shown


as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
The concept
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps notify you that
certain functions are active:

Symbol Function or system

Parking brake set, refer to


page 68

Canada: parking brake set, refer to


page 68.
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
High beams/headlamp flasher, refer
Several of the lamps are checked for proper to page 90
functioning when the engine is started or the ig‐
nition is switched on, and light up briefly. Front fog lamps, refer to page 91

Text messages
Lamp flashes:
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed in‐ DSC or DTC controls the drive and
dicator and warning lamps. braking forces for maintaining vehi‐
cle stability, refer to page 103
Supplementary text messages Engine malfunction with adverse ef‐
You can call up more information, e.g., on the fect on emissions, refer to
cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, page 287
via Check Control, refer to page 83.

15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
At a glance Cockpit

All around the center console

1 Headliner  17 7 Open the tailgate  36  38


2 Control Display  19
3 Hazard warning system  300 Active seat  53

Central locking system  35 Park Distance Control PDC  117


Top View  122
4 Opening glove compartment  143 Backup camera  120
5 Automatic climate control with 2-zone con‐ HDC Hill Descent Control  104
trol  128
Automatic climate control with 4-zone con‐
trol  132
6 Radio and CD/DVD drive  186

16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Cockpit At a glance

DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ 10 Parking brake  68


trol  103
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol  104 11 Adaptive Drive  107

Side View  124 12 Selector lever for automatic transmis‐


sion  74

8 Controller with buttons  18


9 Automatic Hold  69

All around the headliner

1 Emergency Request  300 4 Reading lamps  92

2 Glass sunroof  45  46 5 Interior lamps  92

3 Indicator lamp for the front pas‐


senger airbags  95

17
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
At a glance iDrive

iDrive
Vehicle equipment Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
This chapter describes all series equipment as
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
well as country-specific and special equipment
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
use the controls or enter information unless traf‐
describes equipment that may not be found in
fic and road conditions allow this.◀
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.

The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of a multitude
of switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐
ated from a central location.

Controls at a glance
Controls

1 Control Display 2 Controller with buttons

18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
iDrive At a glance

The buttons can be used to open the menus ▷ Move in four directions, arrow 3
directly. The controller can be used to select ▷ Turn, arrow 4
menu items and create the settings.
▷ Push, arrow 5
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and create the settings.

Buttons on controller 2. "Switch off control display"

Press the button Function

MENU Opens the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

CD Opens the CD/Multimedia


menu.

NAV Opens the Navigation


menu.

TEL Opens the Telephone Switching on


menu. Press the controller again to switch the screen
back on.
BACK Displays the previous
panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu. Operating concept


Opening the main menu
Control Display
Press the button.
Notes
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions, refer to page 308.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.

Switching off

1. Press the button.


The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.

19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
At a glance iDrive

Selecting menu items


Menu items shown in white can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.

White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate


that additional panels can be opened.

View of an opened menu


When a menu is opened, it generally opens with
2. Press the controller. the panel that was last selected in that menu. To
display the first panel of a menu:
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be until the first panel is displayed.
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings". ▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Changing between panels
Opening the Options menu
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. Press the button.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
The current panel is closed and the previous
panel is displayed.
The previous panel is opened again by
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
current panel is not closed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened on top of the previous
display.

Additional options: move the controller to the


right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is dis‐
played.

Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Switch off control
display".

20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
iDrive At a glance

▷ Control options for the selected main menu, Example: setting the clock
e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for Setting the clock
the selected menu, for instance "Store
station". 1. Press the button. The main menu is
displayed.
Changing settings 2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
1. Select a field. lighted, and then press the controller.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.

3. If necessary, move the controller to the left


to display "Time/Date".
3. Press the controller. 4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.

5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐


lighted, and then press the controller.

21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
At a glance iDrive

6. Turn the controller to set the hours and Symbol Meaning


press the controller.
Roaming is active.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller. Text message, e-mail was received.

Check the SIM card.


Status information SIM card is blocked.

Status field SIM card is missing.


The following information is displayed in the sta‐ Enter the PIN.
tus field at the top right:
▷ Time. Entertainment symbols
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off. Symbol Meaning
▷ Wireless network reception strength. CD/DVD player.
▷ Telephone status.
Music collection.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Gracenote® database.
Status field symbols AUX-IN port.
The symbols are grouped into various catego‐
ries. USB audio interface.

Mobile phone audio interface.


Radio symbols

Symbol Meaning
Additional symbols

HD Radio™ is switched on. Symbol Meaning


Satellite radio is switched on. Spoken instructions are switched off.

Request of the current vehicle posi‐


Telephone symbols tion.

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call. Split screen


Missed call.
General information
Wireless network reception strength Additional information can be displayed on the
Symbol flashes: searching for net‐ right side of the split screen, e.g., information
work. from the computer.
Wireless network is not available. In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
Bluetooth is switched on. when you change to another menu.

22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
iDrive At a glance

Switching the split screen on and off Running a function


Press the button.
1. Press the button.
The function will run immediately. This
2. "Split screen"
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Selecting the display

1. Press the button. Displaying the button assignment


2. "Split screen" Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected. The key assignment is displayed at the top edge
of the screen.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.

▷ To display short information: touch the but‐


ton.
▷ To display detailed information: touch the
button for an extended period.
Programmable memory
buttons
Entering letters and numbers
General information 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐ bers.
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
needed.
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu. 3. "OK": confirm the entry.

The settings are stored for the remote control


Symbol Function
currently in use.
Press the controller: delete the letter
Saving a function or number.
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive. Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
2. Press the desired button for more
than two seconds. Enter a blank space.

23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
At a glance iDrive

Switching between letters and


numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering letters and numbers.
Symbol Function

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

Switching between upper and lower


case letters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering uppercase and lowercase let‐
ters.
Symbol Function

Move the controller forward:


switch from upper to lower case
letters.

Move the controller forward:


switch from lower to upper case
letters.

Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered and
letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during the en‐
try for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: town/city names can be
entered using the spelling of language avail‐
able on the Control Display.

24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Voice activation system At a glance

Voice activation system


Vehicle equipment Using voice activation
This chapter describes all series equipment as
Activating the voice activation system
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
1. Press the button on the steering
describes equipment that may not be found in
wheel.
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This 2. Wait for the signal.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ 3. Say the command.
tems. The command appears on the Control Dis‐
play.
The symbol on the Control Display indicates
The concept that the voice activation system is active.
▷ Most functions that are displayed on the If no other commands are available, operate the
Control Display can be operated with the function via iDrive in this case.
voice activation system using spoken com‐
mands. The system prompts you to make Terminating the voice activation
your entries. system
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated us‐ Briefly press the button on the steering
ing the voice activation system. wheel or ›Cancel‹.
▷ The system uses a special microphone lo‐
cated in the area of the interior rearview mir‐
ror. Possible commands
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's Most menu items on the Control Display can be
Manual to use with the voice activation sys‐ voiced as commands.
tem. The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Requirements The functions of the main menu have short com‐
Via the Control Display, set a language that is mands.
also supported by the voice activation system Some list items, such as the phone book entries,
so that the spoken commands can be identified. can also be selected via the voice activation sys‐
Set the language, refer to page 86. tem. Say the list items exactly as they are dis‐
played on the list.

Having possible commands read aloud


You can have the system read possible com‐
mands aloud: ›Voice commands‹.

25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
At a glance Voice activation system

For example, if the "Settings" menu is displayed, On the Control Display:


the commands for the settings are read out loud.
1. "Settings"
Executing functions using short 2. "Language/Units"
commands 3. "Speech mode:"
Functions on the main menu can be performed 4. Select the setting.
directly by means of short commands, usually
irrespective of which menu item is currently se‐
lected, for instance ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands of the voice activation
system, refer to page 316.

Help dialog for the voice activation


system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the
current operating options and the most im‐ Adjusting the volume
portant commands for them are announced. Turn the volume knob while giving an instruction
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information until the desired volume is set.
about the principle of operation for the voice ▷ The volume remains constant even if the
activation system is announced. volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Example: playing back a CD
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary. Notes on Emergency
Requests
2. Press the button on the steering
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
wheel.
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
3. ›C D and multimedia‹ the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
The medium last played is played back. unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel‐
ephone connection.
4. ›C D track ...‹ e.g., CD track 4.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 300, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the Environmental conditions
standard dialog or a shorter version.
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the an‐
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
nouncements from the system are issued in an
sis, and speed.
abbreviated form.

26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Voice activation system At a glance

▷ Always say commands in the language of


the voice activation system.
▷ Keep doors, windows and /panoramic glass
sunroof closed to prevent noise interfer‐
ence.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.

27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that are
useful for driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience are described here.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500


Controls Opening and closing

Opening and closing


Vehicle equipment The settings called up and implemented when
the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote
This chapter describes all series equipment as control is used to unlock the vehicle, refer to
well as country-specific and special equipment Personal Profile.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
In addition, information about service require‐
describes equipment that may not be found in
ments is stored in the remote control, Service
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
data in the remote control, refer to page 286.
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
Integrated key
tems.

Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control

Press button 1 and pull out the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:


▷ Driver's door, refer to page 34.
▷ Cargo floor cover in cargo area, refer to
1 Unlocking page 146.

2 Locking New remote controls


3 Opening tailgate You can obtain new remote controls from your
service center.
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls Loss of the remote controls
with keys. Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
Each remote control contains a rechargeable service center.
battery that is automatically recharged when it
is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven.
Use each remote control at least twice a year for Personal Profile
longer road trips in order to maintain the batter‐
ies' charge status. The concept
In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access, the You can set several of your vehicle's functions
remote control contains a replaceable battery, to suit your personal needs and preferences.
refer to page 42.

30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Opening and closing Controls

▷ The settings are automatically saved in the ▷ Show visual warning for Top View, refer to
profile currently activated in the remote con‐ page 122.
trol. ▷ Show Side View, refer to page 124.
▷ The remote control used is detected when ▷ Backup camera:
the vehicle is unlocked and the stored profile
▷ Function selection, refer to page 120.
is called up.
▷ Type of display, refer to page 122.
▷ Your personal settings will be recognized
and called up again even if the vehicle has ▷ Lane departure warning: last setting, on/off,
been used in the meantime by someone else refer to page 100.
with another remote control. ▷ Head-up Display: selection, brightness and
The individual settings are stored for a maximum position of the display, refer to page 125.
of four remote controls. They are stored for two ▷ Adaptive Drive: selected chassis and sus‐
remote controls if Comfort Access is in use. pension tuning, refer to page 107.
▷ Light settings:
Personal Profile settings
▷ Triple turn signal activation, refer to
The following functions and settings can be page 71.
stored in a profile.
▷ Welcome lamps, refer to page 88.
More information on the settings can be found
under: ▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer
to page 89.
▷ Assigning the programmable memory but‐
tons, refer to page 23. ▷ Daytime running lights, refer to
page 89.
▷ Response of the central locking system
when the car is being unlocked, refer to ▷ High-beam Assistant, refer to
page 32. page 90.

▷ Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to ▷ Automatic climate control with 2-zone con‐
page 35. trol: settings, refer to page 128.

▷ Driver's seat, exterior mirror and steering ▷ Navigation:


wheel positions, refer to page 56. ▷ Voice activation, refer to page 175.
▷ Settings for the display on the Control Dis‐ ▷ Route criteria, refer to page 173.
play and in the instrument cluster: ▷ Map view settings, refer to page 177.
▷ 12h/24h clock format, refer to ▷ Entertainment:
page 85.
▷ Tone control, refer to page 184.
▷ Date format, refer to page 86.
▷ Radio, stored stations, refer to
▷ Brightness of the Control Display, refer page 192.
to page 86.
▷ CD/multimedia, audio source listened to
▷ Language on the Control Display, refer last, refer to page 194.
to page 86.
▷ Telephone: volume, refer to page 234.
▷ Units of measure for fuel consumption,
distance covered/remaining distances,
and temperature, refer to page 86.
▷ Show visual warning for the Park Distance
Control PDC, refer to page 119.

31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Opening and closing

Central locking system Opening and closing: from the


outside
The concept
The central locking system becomes active Using the remote control
when the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and re‐ General information
leases the locks on the following: Take the remote control with you
▷ Doors. People or animals left unattended in a
▷ Tailgate. parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
▷ Fuel filler flap.
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.◀
Operating from the outside
▷ Via the remote control.
Unlocking
▷ Via the door lock.
Press the button. The vehicle is unlocked.
▷ In cars with Comfort Access, via the door
handles. The welcome lamps, interior lamps, and cour‐
tesy lamps are switched on.
The following takes place simultaneously when
locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
control: The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and rently in use.
courtesy lamps are switched on and off. 1. "Settings"
▷ The alarm system is armed or disarmed, re‐ 2. "Door locks"
fer to page 42.
3. "Unlock button:"

Operating from the inside


Via the button for the central locking system, re‐
fer to page 35.
If the vehicle is locked from the inside, the fuel
filler flap remains unlocked.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
central locking system unlocks automatically.
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
come on. 4. Select the desired function:
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel
filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again
unlocks the entire vehicle.

32
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Opening and closing Controls

Convenient opening Before and after each trip, check that the tailgate
Press and hold the button on the remote has not been inadvertently unlocked.
control. Provide edge protection
The windows and the glass sunroof/panoramic Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear
glass sunroof open. window while driving and damage the heating
wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐
Locking tion.◀
Press the button on the remote control.
Locking from the outside Confirmation signals from the vehicle
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if 1. "Settings"
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be 2. "Door locks"
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐ 3. "Flash when lock/unlock"
edge.◀

Switching on the interior lamps and


courtesy lamps
Press the button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.

Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote control for at Retrieving the seat, mirror, and
least 3 seconds. steering wheel settings
The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
wheel positions selected last are stored for the
currently used remote control.
Unlocking tailgate
When the vehicle is being unlocked, these po‐
Press the button on the remote control for
sitions are automatically retrieved if the setting
approx. 1 second and release.
is activated.
The tailgate will open slightly, regardless of
whether it was previously locked or unlocked. Pinch hazard when moving back the seat

With automatic tailgate operation: the tailgate If this function is used, first make sure that
opens automatically. the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty.
Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
damage to objects behind the seat as a result of
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐ a rearward movement of the seat.◀
fore opening.
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do
not place the remote control into the cargo area. ▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is ▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐
pushed closed. ory is pressed.

33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Opening and closing

Selecting automatic activation ▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
1. "Settings" ence, and

2. "Door locks" ▷ this device must accept any interference re‐


ceived, including interference that may
3. "Last seat position auto."
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.

Using the door lock

General information
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
Malfunctions there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
Local radio waves may interfere with the remote unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
control. edge.◀

In this case, unlock and lock the car at the door


lock with the integrated key.
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote
control, the battery in the remote control is dis‐
charged. Use the remote control during an ex‐
tended drive in order to recharge the battery,
refer to page 30. The remote control for Comfort
Access contains a battery that may need to be
replaced, refer to page 42.
When unlocking:
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with 1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication door and the fuel filler flap.
Commission regulations. Operation is governed 2. Turning the key a second time unlocks the
by the following: remaining doors and the tailgate.
FCC ID:
Manual operation
LX8766S
If an electrical malfunction occurs, unlock or lock
LX8766E the driver's door using the integrated key in the
LX8CAS door lock.
LX8CAS2
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:

34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Opening and closing Controls

Opening and closing: from the


inside

Unlocking and opening


▷ Press the button. The doors are un‐
locked. To open, pull the door han‐
Locking and unlocking dle above the armrest.
Press the button in the vehicle. ▷ Pull the door handle above the armrest
twice: the door is unlocked the first time and
The doors and the tailgate are locked or un‐ opened the second time.
locked when the front doors are closed, but they
are not secured against theft. Locking
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. ▷ Press the button. The doors are
locked.
Automatic locking ▷ Press the lock button of a door. To prevent
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ you from being locked out, the opened driv‐
rently in use. er's door cannot be locked using the lock
button.
1. "Settings"
Take the remote control with you
2. "Door locks"
People or animals left unattended in a
3. Select the desired function:
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
▷ "Lock if no door is opened" side. Always take the remote control with you
The vehicle locks automatically after a when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
short period of time if a door is not then be opened from the outside.◀
opened.
▷ "Lock after start. to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after Doors
you drive away.
Automatic soft closing
To close the doors, push lightly. It is closed au‐
tomatically.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Opening and closing

BMW X5: upper tailgate Opening manually


In case of an electrical malfunction:
Opening
1. From the cargo area, press out the handle in
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. the tailgate, refer to arrow, with a screw‐
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐ driver and pull. The tailgate is unlocked.
fore opening.
Provide edge protection
Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear
window while driving and damage the heating
wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐
tion.◀

Opening from the inside

2. Open the tailgate from the outside and press


in the handle.
The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is
closed.

Closing

Press the button. The tailgate opens somewhat


unless it has been locked.

Opening from the outside

Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate


can be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐
gate.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the tail‐
gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Press the button, see arrow, or the button
of the remote control for approx. 1 second. The Automatic soft closing
tailgate opens slightly. It can be swung upward. To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly
only. It is closed automatically.

36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Opening and closing Controls

Automatic tailgate operation ▷ Press the button in the center con‐


sole.
Adjusting opening height ▷ Press the button on the remote control
You can set how far the tailgate should open. for approx. 1 second and release.
Adjusting the opening height The opening procedure is interrupted:
When adjusting the opening height, en‐ ▷ When the engine starts.
sure that there is a clearance of at least ▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
4 in/10 cm above the tailgate. Otherwise, the
▷ By pressing the button in the center
ceiling may not be high enough for the open tail‐
console again.
gate if the load situation changes.◀
▷ By pressing the button on the remote
1. "Settings" control for a longer period.
2. "Tailgate" ▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the
3. Turn the controller until the desired opening tailgate.
height is selected. ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.

Closing
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the tail‐
gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Function requirement:
The lower tailgate is closed and must be locked
on both sides.
Opening
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
fore opening.
The tailgate opens automatically to the adjusted
opening height.

The tailgate closes automatically when the but‐


ton on the inside of the tailgate is pressed.
To stop the closing procedure:
▷ Press the button on the inside of the tailgate.
▷ Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐
gate.
▷ Press the button on the outside of the tail‐
gate when the vehicle is unlocked. The closing procedure is also stopped:
▷ When the engine starts.

37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Opening and closing

▷ If the vehicle jerks while driving away. BMW X6: tailgate


The closing procedure is not interrupted when
the vehicle starts moving. Automatic tailgate operation

Manually opening or closing Adjusting opening height


In case of an electrical defect of the automatic You can set how far the tailgate should open.
tailgate operation function:
Adjusting the opening height
1. Manually release the tailgate, refer to When adjusting the opening height, en‐
page 36. sure that there is a clearance of at least
2. Open or close the tailgate slowly and with‐ 4 in/10 cm above the tailgate. Otherwise, the
out making sudden movements. ceiling may not be high enough for the open tail‐
gate if the load situation changes.◀
Do not use force to open or close
If the tailgate offers increased resistance, 1. "Settings"
do not forcefully open or close the tailgate; oth‐ 2. "Tailgate"
erwise, injury or damage may result.◀ 3. Turn the controller until the desired opening
height is selected.

BMW X5: lower tailgate


Opening

Opening
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
Pull the lever and swing the tailgate downward. fore opening.
The tailgate opens automatically to the adjusted
The opened tailgate can be loaded with up to opening height.
550 lbs/250 kg.

Closing
Fold the tailgate up and press closed.

38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Opening and closing Controls

The tailgate closes automatically when the but‐


ton on the inside of the tailgate is pressed.
To stop the closing procedure:
▷ Press the button on the inside of the tailgate.
▷ Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐
gate.
The closing procedure is also stopped:
▷ When the engine starts.
▷ Press the button on the outside of the tail‐ ▷ If the vehicle jerks while driving away.
gate when the vehicle is unlocked.
Closing is not canceled when you put the vehicle
▷ Press the button in the center con‐ into motion.
sole. Automatic closing
▷ Press the button on the remote control The tailgate closes automatically without
for approx. 1 second and release. button operation if it is weighed down by an ad‐
The opening procedure is interrupted: ditional weight of approx. 11 lbs/5 kg, such as
▷ When the engine starts. snow or ice.◀

▷ When the vehicle starts moving.


Manually opening or closing
▷ By pressing the button in the center
console again. In case of an electrical malfunction:

▷ By pressing the button on the remote 1. Push out cover 1 on the tailgate with a
control for a longer period. screwdriver.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the
tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.

Closing
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the tail‐
gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
2. Push the catch 2 in the direction of the ar‐
row.
3. Open or close the tailgate slowly and with‐
out making sudden movements.
Do not use force to open or close
If the tailgate offers increased resistance,
do not forcefully open or close the tailgate; oth‐
erwise, injury or damage may result.◀

39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Opening and closing

Comfort Access Unlocking

The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is nearby or in the passenger
compartment.
Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions: This corresponds to pressing the button.
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately. Locking
▷ Starting the engine.
▷ Convenient closing.

Functional requirement
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must
be located outside of the vehicle.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the remote Touch the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with
control is inside the vehicle. your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the but‐
Comparison with ordinary remote
ton.
control
The functions can be controlled by pressing the To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
buttons or via Comfort Access. and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
Should a short delay occur when opening or sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐
closing the windows or the glass sunroof/pan‐ hicle.
oramic glass sunroof, the system checks If a remote control is detected within the vehicle,
whether a remote control is located in the vehi‐ the vehicle does not lock or is unlocked again.
cle. Please repeat opening or closing if neces‐
sary. Convenient closing
Press the area, arrow 2, with your finger and
hold.
In addition, the windows and the glass sunroof/
panoramic glass sunroof close.

40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Opening and closing Controls

Monitor the closing process Malfunction


Watch during the closing process to be The Comfort Access functions can be disturbed
sure that no one is injured. Removing the hand by local radio waves, such as by a mobile phone
from the door handle immediately stops the in the immediate vicinity of the remote control or
closing process.◀ when a mobile phone is being charged in the
vehicle.
Unlocking the tailgate separately If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using the
Press the button on the exterior of the tailgate. buttons on the remote control or use the
integrated key in the door lock.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
To start the engine afterward, insert the remote
If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo control into the ignition switch.
area is detected in the locked vehicle, the tail‐
gate opens again.
Warning lamps
The hazard warning flashers flash and a signal
The warning lamp in the instrument
sounds.
cluster lights up when you attempt to
start the engine: the engine cannot be
Ignition on
started.
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig‐
The remote control is not in the vehicle or has a
nition on.
malfunction. Take the remote control with you
When doing so, do not depress the brake pedal, inside the vehicle or have it checked. If neces‐
otherwise the engine will start. sary, insert another remote control into the ig‐
nition switch.
Starting the engine
The engine can be started or the ignition can be The warning lamp in the instrument
switched on when a remote control is inside the cluster lights up while the engine is
vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote running: the remote control is no lon‐
control into the ignition lock, refer to page 66. ger inside the vehicle.
As long as no remote control is detected in the After switching off the engine, the engine can
vehicle, it is only possible to restart the engine only be started again within approx. 10 seconds
within approx. 10 seconds after it is switched off if no door has been opened.
if no door has been opened.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
Switching off the engine cluster comes on and a message ap‐
pears on the Control Display: replace
▷ Remote control not in ignition lock:
the remote control battery.
After switching off the engine, the transmis‐
sion is automatically switched into transmis‐
sion position P.
▷ Remote control in ignition lock:
If transmission position N is engaged, the
transmission remains in this position after
the engine is switched off.

41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Opening and closing

Replacing the battery Arming and disarming the alarm


The remote control for Comfort Access con‐ system
tains a battery that will need to be replaced from
time to time. General information
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
control, refer to page 30.
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
2. Remove the cover.
Door lock and armed alarm system
Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm
on some market-specific versions.
To stop this alarm, unlock the vehicle with the
remote control or switch on the ignition.

Tailgate and armed alarm system


The tailgate can be opened using the remote
control, even if the alarm system is armed.
3. Insert a new battery of the same type with
Press the button on the remote control.
the positive side facing upwards.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐
4. Press the cover closed.
tored again by the alarm system. The hazard
Return used battery to a recycling collec‐ warning system flashes once.
tion point or to your service center. In some market-specific versions, the tailgate
can only be opened using the remote control if
the vehicle was unlocked first.
Alarm system
Switching off the alarm
The concept ▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
The vehicle alarm system responds to: refer to page 32.
▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate. ▷ Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
▷ Movements in the vehicle: interior motion
sensor, refer to page 43.
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐ mirror
tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.
▷ By flashing the high beams.

▷ The indicator lamp flashes continuously:

42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Opening and closing Controls

The system is armed. Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking: interior motion sensor
The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed Press the remote control button again
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐ within 10 seconds after the vehicle is locked.
cured. The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
The indicator lamp flashes continuously af‐ onds and then flashes continuously.
ter approx. 10 seconds. The interior motion The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
sensor is not active. remain switched off until the vehicle is locked
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking: again.
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking Power windows
until the remote control is inserted in the ig‐
nition, but for no longer than approx. 5 mi‐ General information
nutes:
Take the remote control with you
An alarm has been triggered.
Take the remote control with you when
Panic mode leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the power windows and injure
In dangerous situations, trigger the alarm sys‐
themselves.◀
tem:
Press the button on the remote control for at
least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Tilt alarm sensor


The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.

Interior motion sensor Opening


For the sensor to function properly, the windows
and glass sunroof/panoramic glass sunroof ▷ Press the switch to the resistance
must be closed. point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
can be switched off together, such as in the fol‐ ance point.
lowing situations: The window opens automatically.
▷ In duplex garages. Pressing again stops the motion.
▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.

43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Opening and closing

Closing Closing without the pinch protection


Danger of pinching
system
For example, if there is an external danger or if
Monitor the closing process and make
ice on the windows prevents a window from
sure that the closing path of the window is clear;
closing normally, proceed as follows:
otherwise, injuries may result.◀
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. hold it there.
The window closes while the switch is held. Pinch protection is limited and the window
reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance a certain value.
point. 2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
The window closes automatically. again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
Pressing the switch stops the motion.
The window closes without pinch protec‐
Convenient operation, refer to page 32, via the
tion.
remote control or the door lock.
Convenient closing, refer to page 40, with Com‐ Safety switch
fort Access.
With the safety switch, the rear windows are
prevented from being opened or closed via the
After the ignition is switched off switches in the rear passenger area, such as by
When the remote control is removed or the ig‐ children.
nition is switched off, the windows can continue
to be operated for approx. 1 minute as long as Press the button.
no door is opened.
The LED lights up if the safety function is
switched on.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a Safety switch for rear operation
window closes, the closing action is interrupted. Press the safety switch when transporting
The window reopens slightly. children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result
if the windows are closed without supervision.◀
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check Roller sunblinds for the rear
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
side windows
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀ Pull the loop of the roller sun blind and hook onto
bracket.
Do not use window accessories
Do not open the window while the roller
Do not install any accessories in the range
sunblind is tilted
of movement of the windows; otherwise, the
pinch protection system will be impaired.◀ Do not open the window while the roller sunblind
is tilted; otherwise, there is a risk of damage at
high speeds that may result in personal injury.◀

44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Opening and closing Controls

X5: panoramic glass sunroof ▷ Press the switch in the de‐


sired direction to the resist‐
General information ance point and hold it there.
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be The sliding visor moves while
operated together or separately using the the switch is being held.
switch. ▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
Danger of pinching
The sliding visor moves automatically.
Monitor the closing process and make
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Opening/closing the glass sunroof
Take the remote control with you
With the sliding visor open, proceed as descri‐
Take the remote control with you when bed under Sliding visor.
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the roof and injure themselves.◀ Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor together
Press the switch twice in the de‐
sired direction past the resist‐
ance point.
The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor move together. Pressing the
switch again stops the motion.

Convenient operation, refer to page 32, via the


remote control or the door lock.
Tilting the glass sunroof Convenient closing, refer to page 40, with Com‐
Press the switch. fort Access.
The closed sunroof is tilted and
Comfort function
the sliding visor opens slightly.
▷ Press the switch twice with
the sunroof open:
Do not use force to close the sliding visor The sunroof is raised.
Do not use force to close the sliding visor ▷ When the sunroof is raised,
with the glass sunroof in its tilted position, oth‐ briefly press the switch twice
erwise the mechanism will be damaged.◀ in the opening direction:
The sunroof is opened all the
Opening/closing the sliding visor way.
You can move the sliding visor independently
with the sunroof closed or tilted. Comfort position
In the comfort position, the roof is not fully open.
This reduces wind noise in the passenger com‐
partment.

45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Opening and closing

Each time the glass sunroof is opened or closed BMW X6: glass sunroof,
all the way, it stops in the comfort position. If
desired, continue the motion following this with
electric
the switch.
General information
After the ignition is switched off Danger of pinching
The roof can still be operated for approx. 1 mi‐ Monitor the closing process and make
nute, as long as no door has been opened. sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Pinch protection system
Take the remote control with you
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐ Take the remote control with you when
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
one-third of the opening in the roof, or from the cannot operate the roof and injure themselves.◀
tilted position during closing.
The roof and the sliding visor open a short dis‐
tance.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check that
the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the
closing action may not be interrupted in certain
extreme situations, such as when thin objects
are present.◀
Tilting the glass sunroof

Closing without the pinch protection Press the switch.


system The closed sunroof is tilted and
For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐ the sliding visor opens slightly.
ceed as follows:
Press the switch forward beyond the resistance
Do not use force to close the sliding visor
point and hold. The roof closes without the pinch
protection system. Do not use force to close the sliding visor
with the glass sunroof in its tilted position, oth‐
Initialization after a power failure erwise the mechanism will be damaged.◀
After a power failure, it is only possible to raise
the roof, if necessary. Opening/closing the glass sunroof
Have the system initialized by your service cen‐ ▷ Press the switch in the de‐
ter. sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
The glass sunroof moves
while the switch is being held.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.

46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Opening and closing Controls

The glass sunroof moves automatically. Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
Pressing the switch again stops the motion. tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check that
The glass sunroof and sliding visor can be
the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the
opened together. Close the sliding visor man‐
closing action may not be interrupted in certain
ually.
extreme situations, such as when thin objects
Convenient operation, refer to page 33, via the are present.◀
remote control or the door lock.
Convenient closing, refer to page 40, with Com‐ Closing without the pinch protection
fort Access. system
For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐
Opening/closing the glass sunroof
ceed as follows:
automatically
Press the switch beyond the resistance point. 1. Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐
ance point and hold. The pinch protection
The following movements are also automatic:
system is limited and the sunroof opens
▷ Pressing the switch with the sunroof open: slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain
the sunroof is tilted fully. value.
▷ Pressing the switch in the Open direction 2. Within about 4 seconds, slide the switch for‐
with the sunroof tilted: the sunroof is opened ward again beyond the resistance point and
fully. hold it there. The roof closes without the
Pressing the switch again stops the motion. pinch protection system.

Comfort position Initialization after a power failure


In the comfort position, the roof is not fully open. After a power failure, it is only possible to raise
This reduces wind noise in the passenger com‐ the roof, if necessary.
partment. Have the system initialized by your service cen‐
Each time the glass sunroof is opened or closed ter.
all the way, it stops in the comfort position. If
desired, continue the motion following this with
the switch.

After the ignition is switched off


The roof can still be operated for approx. 1 mi‐
nute, as long as no door has been opened.

Pinch protection system


If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the
middle of the opening in the roof, or from the
tilted position during closing.
The glass sunroof opens again fully.

47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Adjusting

Adjusting
Vehicle equipment Adjusting manually

This chapter describes all series equipment as Forward/backward


well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.

Sitting safely
Pull the lever and slide the seat into the desired
The ideal seating position can make a vital con‐
position. After releasing the lever, move the seat
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
forward or back slightly to make sure it engages
The seating position plays an important role in properly.
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 53. Thigh support
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 54.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 93.

Seats
Note before adjusting
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat
while driving. Pull the lever and move the thigh support for‐
ward or back.
The seat could respond with unexpected move‐
ment and the ensuing loss of vehicle control
could lead to an accident.◀

Do not incline the backrest too far to the


rear
Do not incline the backrest on the front passen‐
ger side too far to the rear during driving. Oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of sliding under the
safety belt in an accident. This would eliminate
the protection normally provided by the belt.◀

48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Adjusting Controls

Adjusting electrically

1 Backrest width

1 Forward/backward 2 Shoulder support

2 Height 3 Thigh support

3 Seat tilt 4 Lumbar support

Backrest width
The width of the backrest can be changed with
the side wings to adjust the side support to your
own needs.

Shoulder support
This also supports the back in the shoulder area,
This creates a relaxed sitting position and helps
relieve stress on the shoulder muscles.
4 Backrest
The shoulder support is also used to adjust the
Differs depending on seat: distance of the head restraint from the back of
the seat occupant's head.

Lumbar support

1 Backrest
2 Height

Additional depending on seat: You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup‐
plementary support to help you maintain a re‐
laxed, upright sitting position.
▷ Increase or decrease curvature:

49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Adjusting

Press front or rear section of switch.


▷ Shift curvature up or down:
Press upper or lower section of switch.

BMW X5: rear seats


2nd row seats
If the row of seats is divided, each side can be Pull the lever and apply weight to or remove
adjusted separately. weight from the backrest as needed.
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Never adjust the 2nd row seats while the Access to 3rd row seats
vehicle is moving, as otherwise the passengers
on the 3rd row seats could be injured.
Make sure that the locking devices of the 2nd
row seats engage properly. Otherwise the re‐
straining effect of the safety belts during an ac‐
cident could be reduced.◀

Longitudinal direction

Pull the lever and fold the seat forward.

The handle recess on the interior trim of the door


pillar makes climbing in easier.
Keep the footwell under the 2nd row seats
clear
When folding back the 2nd row seats, make sure
that the footwell under the 2nd row seats is
1. Pull the lever and slide the seat into the de‐ clear. Otherwise persons in the 3rd row seats
sired position. could be injured or objects damaged.◀
2. Release the lever and move the seat slightly
Warning lamp for the 2nd row seats:
forward or back so that it engages properly.
lights up if the 2nd row seats are not
locked. A message also appears on
Backrest the Control Display.
The backrests can be adjusted in four steps.

3rd row seats


The 3rd row seats are divided and offer space
for two persons.

50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Adjusting Controls

Folding up backrest Seat heating


Before folding up the backrest, remove the lug‐
gage compartment roller cover, refer to Front
page 140, and, if necessary, slide the 2nd row
seats slightly forward.
1. Pull the lever, refer to arrow. The backrest is
unlocked.

The temperature setting progresses one step


through its control sequence each time you
press the button. The maximum temperature is
reached when three LEDs are lit.

2. Fold up and engage the backrest. If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes,
the seat heating is activated automatically with
Ensure that the lock is securely en‐ the temperature set last.
gaged
To switch off: press and hold the button.
Make sure that the catch engages securely.
The temperature is reduced, if need be, down to
If it is not properly engaged, transported
no heat in order to reduce the load on the bat‐
cargo could enter the passenger compart‐
tery. The LEDs remain lit.
ment during braking or evasive maneuvers
and endanger the vehicle occupants.◀
Rear
3. Push the head restraints into the top posi‐
tion.

Folding backrest down


1. Push the head restraints down, refer to
page 56.
2. Pull the lever, refer to arrows. The backrests
are released.

Operation similar to front seat heating, without


temperature distribution.

3. Fold the backrest down.

51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Adjusting

Active seat ventilation and 2. "Seat heating distribution"


seat heating
Front

3. Turn the controller to adjust the distribution.


The setting is applied.

1 Seat heating Temperature distribution with active


2 Active seat ventilation
seat ventilation
The heat output can be distributed variously in
Press button 1 or 2 once depending on the tem‐ the seat cushion and the backrest.
perature or ventilation position. The LED in the
respective button lights up. 1. Press button 1.

The temperature and ventilation levels are dis‐ 2. "Seat heating distribution"
played in bar form on the Control Display. A dis‐
play of three bars indicates the highest level of
seat heating or seat ventilation.
The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower
may be switched off entirely to save on battery
power. The LEDs remain lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes,
the seat heating is activated automatically with
the temperature set last.
To switch off: press and hold button 1 or 2. 3. Turn the controller to adjust the distribution.
The setting is applied.
Temperature distribution without
active seat ventilation Heated rear seats
The heat output can be distributed variously in Operation similar to front seat heating, without
the seat cushion and the backrest. temperature distribution, refer to page 51.

1. Press button 1.

52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Adjusting Controls

Active seat Notes


One person per safety belt
Never allow more than one person to wear
a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small
children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀

Putting on the belt


Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low
The seat cushion is actively varied by alternately around the hips in the lap area and does not
raising and lowering the right and left half of the press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can
seat cushion. This reduces muscular tension slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal im‐
and fatigue to help prevent lower back pain. pact and injure the abdomen.

Press the button to switch on; the LED lights up. The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub
on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka‐
The action of the system is reduced and if need
ble objects, or be pinched.◀
be, switched off in order to reduce the load on
the battery. The LED remains lit. Reduction of restraining effect
When the active seat is switched off, it can take Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the
up to 1 minute before the two halves of the seat belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder
cushion have returned to their initial position. belt periodically to readjust the tension across
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the
safety belt may be reduced.◀
Safety belts
Using the middle safety belt
General information If the middle safety belt in the rear is used,
Always make sure that safety belts are being the larger section of the backrest must be
worn by all occupants before driving away. locked. Otherwise, the safety belt will not have
a restraining effect.◀
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts. Buckling the belt

Number of safety belts


Your vehicle has been fitted with safety belts for
the safety of you and your passengers.
▷ BMW X5: five or seven safety belts.
▷ BMW X6: four or five safety belts.

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the


belt buckle.

53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Adjusting

Unbuckling the belt responding message is displayed on the Control


1. Hold the belt firmly. Display.

2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.


Calibrating driver's seat
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
The warning lamp lights up. A mes‐
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be sage also appears on the Control Dis‐
correct for adult seat occupants of every build if play. Please calibrate the driver's seat.
the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 48.
The two rear safety belt buckles integrated into 1. Move the driver's seat forward until it stops.
the rear seat are for passengers sitting on the 2. Move the driver's seat forward again. It
left and right. The belt buckle embossed with the briefly moves toward the front in the proc‐
word CENTER is intended exclusively for use by ess.
passengers riding in the center position. 3. Set the desired seating position again.
The calibration is completed when the message
Safety belt reminder for the driver's and
on the Control Display disappears. Should this
front passenger seat
message continue to be displayed, repeat the
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐ calibration. If the message does not disappear
nal sounds. In addition, a message ap‐ even after repeated calibration, have the system
pears on the Control Display. Check checked as soon as possible.
whether the safety belt has been fastened cor‐
rectly. Do not carry out calibration while the ve‐
hicle is moving
The safety belt reminder is active at speeds Never carry out calibration while the vehicle is
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac‐ moving, as this can cause accidents.
tivated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
Make sure that no persons or objects become
senger seat.
wedged during the calibration process, as this
can cause injuries or damage.◀
Damage to safety belts
In the case of strain caused by accidents or
damage:
Head restraints
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors Correctly adjusted head restraints
checked.
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
Checking and replacing safety belts risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Have the work performed only by your Adjusting the head restraint
service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
that this safety feature will function properly.◀
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀
Belt-force limiter
BMW X5: push the head restraints of the 3rd row
The effect of the belt-force limiter on the driver's
seats into the top position.
seat is dependent on the position of the driver's
seat.
To maintain the long-term accuracy of this func‐
tion, the driver's seat must be calibrated if a cor‐

54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Adjusting Controls

Height Electrical
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐
prox. at ear level.

Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.

Active front head restraints


In the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient
severity, the active head restraint reduces the Adjusting electrically.
distance to the head.
Reduced protective function Front seats: adjusting the distance
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint cov‐ from the back of the head
ers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraints.
▷ Only attach accessories approved by BMW
to the seat or head restraint.
Otherwise, the protective function of the active
head restraint will be impaired and the personal
safety of the occupants will be endangered.
Have the active head restraints reset after they
Press the button and pull the headrest cushion
are triggered in a rear-end collision. Have this
forward or push it back.
work performed by the service center only; oth‐
erwise, this safety feature with not be opera‐ Compromised performance
tional.◀
Do not place any objects behind the head‐
Please contact the service center if the front rest cushion. Otherwise, you can impair the
head restraints need to be removed or installed. proper function of the head restraint.◀

Front seats: adjusting the height Comfort seat


Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐ The distance from the back of the seat occu‐
prox. at ear level. pant's head can be adjusted using the shoulder
support, refer to page 49.

55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Adjusting

Adjusting side extensions Seat, mirror, and steering


wheel memory
General information
Two different driver's seat and front passenger
seat positions, exterior mirror positions and
steering wheel positions can be stored and re‐
trieved.
The adjustment of the backrest width and the
lumbar support is not stored in the memory.
You can fold the side extensions on the head re‐
straint forward for increased lateral support in Storing
the resting position.

BMW X5: rear seats and 3rd row seats


Adjusting the height

1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐


tion, refer to page 66.
2. Set the desired seat, exterior mirror and
steering wheel positions.
▷ To raise: pull.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and 3. Press the button. The LED in the
push the head restraint down. button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2. The
In vehicles equipped with 3rd row seats, the LED goes out.
height of the middle head restraint is not adjust‐
If the M button is pressed accidentally:
able.

Press the button again. The LED goes


Removing
out.
1. Pull the head restraint upward to the stop.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head Calling up settings
restraint out completely.
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving
BMW X6: rear seats
Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving,
The head restraints in the rear cannot be ad‐
as an unexpected seat movement could result
justed and cannot be removed.
in an accident.◀

56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Adjusting Controls

Comfort function At a glance


1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or
switch on the radio ready state, refer to
page 66.
2. Briefly press the desired memory but‐
ton 1 or 2.
The seat is automatically moved to the stored
position.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed. 1 Adjusting
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
Safety mode 3 Fold in and out
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni‐
tion on or off, refer to page 66.
Selecting a mirror
2. Press and hold the desired memory button
1 or 2 until the setting procedure is com‐ To change over to the other mirror:
pleted.
Slide the mirror changeover switch.

Adjusting electrically
Mirrors
The setting corresponds to the direction
Exterior mirrors in which the button is pressed.

General information Saving positions


The mirror on the passenger side is more curved
Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 56.
than the driver's mirror.
Estimating distances correctly Adjusting manually
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance press the edges of the mirror glass.
to the traffic behind you based on what you see
in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an Automatic Curb Monitor
accident.◀ When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
senger side. This improves your view of the curb
and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for
example.

Activating

1. Slide the mirror changeover switch


to the driver's side mirror position.

57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Adjusting

2. Shift into reverse or engage transmission Interior rearview mirror


position R.
Reducing the blinding effect
Deactivating
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
senger's side mirror position.

Fold in and out


Press button 3.
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
▷ In car washes.
From behind when driving at night: turn the
▷ In narrow streets. knob.
▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐ dimming feature
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the
button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de‐
pending on the width of the vehicle.◀

Automatic heating
Depending on the external temperature, both
exterior mirrors are automatically heated when Two photocells are used for control:
the engine is running or the ignition is switched ▷ In the mirror glass, see arrow.
on. ▷ On the back of the mirror.

For proper operation:


▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.

58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Adjusting Controls

Steering wheel Storing steering wheel positions, refer to Seat,


mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer to
General information page 56.

Do not adjust while driving Easy entry/exit


Do not adjust the steering wheel while To facilitate entry and exit, the steering wheel
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement temporarily moves into the uppermost position.
could result in an accident.◀
Steering wheel heating
Adjusting
Switching on/off
Mechanical

Press the button.


1. Fold the lever down.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐ ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Do not use force to swing the lever back.
Do not use force to swing the lever back
up; otherwise, the mechanism will be dam‐
aged.◀

Electric

The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐


rections.

59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Transporting children safely

Transporting children safely


Vehicle equipment passenger side are deactivated. Automatic de‐
activation of front passenger airbags, refer to
This chapter describes all series equipment as page 94.
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also Deactivating the front passenger airbags
describes equipment that may not be found in If a child restraint fixing system is used in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected the front passenger seat, the front passenger
special equipment or the country version. This airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ an increased risk of injury to the child when the
tems. airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.◀

The right place for children


Installing child restraint fixing
Note
systems
Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the Notes
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐ Manufacturer's information for child re‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the straint fixing systems
doors.◀
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
systems, observe the information provided by
Children should always be in the rear the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
Accident research shows that the safest place tective effect can be impaired.◀
for children is on the rear seat.
Note the following in vehicles equipped
Transporting children in the rear with 3rd row seats
Transport children younger than 13 years BMW X5: in vehicles with 3rd row seats, make
of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm on the 2nd row sure that the seat of the 2nd row seats on which
seats only, using child restraint fixing systems the child restraint fixing system is mounted is
suitable for the age, weight, and height of the properly locked. Otherwise, there is an in‐
child. Otherwise, there is the increased danger creased risk of injury for the child in an accident.
of injury in an accident.
Do not mount child restraint fixing systems on
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a the 3rd row seats, as otherwise the protection
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint provided by these child restraint fixing systems
fixing system can no longer be used, due to their may be reduced.◀
age, weight and size.◀
BMW X5: before mounting a child restraint fixing
system in the center seat of the 2nd row seats,
Children on the front passenger seat move the outer seat cushions and backrests into
Should it be necessary to use a child restraint the rearmost positions.
fixing system on the front passenger seat, make
sure that the front and side airbags on the front

60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Transporting children safely Controls

On the front passenger seat Child seat security


After installing a child restraint fixing system on
the front passenger seat, ensure that the front
and side airbags on the front passenger side are
deactivated.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
an increased risk of injury to the child when the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint The rear safety belts
fixing system.◀ ▷ BMW X5: all safety belts of the 2nd and 3rd
row seats
Seat position and height ▷ BMW X6: all safety belts of the 2nd row seats
Before installing a child restraint fixing system, And the safety belt for the front passenger can
move the front passenger seat as far back as be locked to prevent extension in order to permit
possible and adjust its height to the highest po‐ attachment of child restraint fixing systems.
sition to obtain the best possible position for the
belt and to offer optimal protection in the event Locking the safety belt
of an accident. 1. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
Do not change the seat position and height after 2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with
this. the belt.

Backrest width 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and


pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
Before mounting a child restraint fixing system system. The safety belt is locked.
on the front passenger seat, open the backrest
width, refer to page 49, completely. Do not
Unlocking the safety belt
change the backrest width after this.
1. Open the belt buckle.
Backrest width for the child seat
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
Before installing a child restraint fixing
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
system in the front passenger seat, the backrest
pletely.
width must be opened completely. Do not
change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the
stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.

61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Transporting children safely

Note Child restraint fixing system with a


Manufacturer's information for LATCH
tether strap
child restraint fixing systems
Mounting points
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing systems, observe the operating and safety LATCH mounting eyes
information from the system manufacturer; oth‐ Only use the mounting eyes for the upper
erwise, the level of protection may be reduced.◀ LATCH retaining strap to secure child restraint
fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors could be damaged.◀

Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐


BMW X5
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint fix‐
ing system is resting snugly against the back‐
rest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered
may be reduced.◀

There are additional mounting points for child


restraint fixing systems with a tether strap on the
2nd row seats, refer to arrows. Fold out before
using the center mounting point.

BMW X6
The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are
located at the points indicated by the arrows.

Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing


systems
1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer
to the operating instructions of the system.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
For child restraint fixing systems with tether
strap, there are additional mounting points on
the back of the rear seat backrests, see arrows.

62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Transporting children safely Controls

Retaining strap guide


Retaining strap
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it
passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap
will not properly secure the child restraint fixing
system in the event of an accident.◀

BMW X5
BMW X6: outer rear seats

1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint 1 Direction of travel
3 Hook for upper retaining strap 2 Head restraint
4 Mounting point 3 Hook for upper retaining strap
5 Backrest 4 Mounting point
6 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fixing 5 Backrest
system 6 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fixing
system
When using the cargo cover, pass the upper re‐
taining strap between the backrest of the 2nd When using the cargo cover, pass the upper re‐
row seats and the cargo cover. taining strap between the rear seat backrest and
the cargo cover.

63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Transporting children safely

BMW X6: center rear seat Attaching the retaining strap to the
backrest of the 2nd row seats

BMW X5
On outer seats:

1. Slide the head restraint upward.


2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the
supports of the head restraint.
3. Attach the upper retaining strap to the
mounting point with the hook.
4. Slide the head restraint into the bottom po‐
sition.
5. Pull the upper retaining strap taut.
On the center seat when equipped with two
rows of seats:

1. Fold the center armrest somewhat toward


the front.
2. Guide the tether strap through the opening
1 Direction of travel in the center armrest.
2 Head restraint
3 Strap guide
4 Hook for upper retaining strap
5 Mounting point
6 Backrest
7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fixing
system

When using the cargo cover, pass the upper re‐


3. Fold back and engage the center armrest.
taining strap between the rear seat backrest and
the cargo cover. 4. Hook in tether strap on mounting point.
5. Pull tether strap taut.

64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Transporting children safely Controls

On the center seat when equipped with three Safety switch for the rear
rows of seats:
Press the button on the driver's door if
1. Slide the head restraint upward. children are being transported in the
2. Guide the tether strap between the head re‐ rear.
straint brackets. This locks the rear window switches so that the
3. Hook in the tether strap on the mounting windows cannot be operated from the rear:
point with the hook. safety switch, refer to page 44.
4. Slide the head restraint into the bottom po‐
sition.
5. Pull tether strap taut.

BMW X6
1. Route the upper retaining strap over the
middle of the head restraint.
2. Attach the upper retaining strap to the
mounting point with the hook.
3. Pull the retaining strap taut until it com‐
presses the cushion of the head restraint,
thus preventing the strap from sliding off.

Locking the doors and


windows
Rear doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.


The door can now be opened from the outside
only.

65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Driving

Driving
Vehicle equipment Before removing the remote control, push it all
the way in to release the locking mechanism.
This chapter describes all series equipment as
The ignition is switched off if it was on.
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected Start/Stop button
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.

Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig‐
nition on or off and starts the engine.

The engine starts if the brake pedal is pressed


when you press the Start/Stop button.

Radio ready state


Individual electrical consumers can operate.
The time and the external temperature are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Insert the remote control all the way into the ig‐
nition lock. Radio ready state is switched off automatically:
Radio ready state is switched on. Individual elec‐ ▷ When the remote control is removed from
trical consumers can operate. the ignition lock.
▷ In cars with Comfort Access, refer to
Comfort Access page 40, by touching the surface above the
If the car is equipped with Comfort Access, only door lock.
insert the remote control into the ignition lock,
refer to page 40, under special circumstances. Ignition on
All electrical consumers can operate. The od‐
Removing the remote control from the ometer and trip odometer are displayed in the
ignition lock instrument cluster.
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out To save battery power when the engine is off,
of the ignition lock switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the
ignition lock as this may cause damage.◀

66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving Controls

Radio ready state and ignition off Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis‐ vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
plays in the instrument cluster go out. away, but at moderate engine speeds.

Transmission position P with the ignition Starting the engine


off
When the ignition is switched off, position P is
engaged automatically. When in an automatic
car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is
not switched off accidentally.◀

For example, the ignition is not switched off in


the following situations:
▷ The brake is applied.
▷ The low beams are switched on
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Com‐
fort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 40.
Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
General information
The starter operates automatically for a certain
Enclosed areas
time, and stops automatically as soon as the en‐
Do not let the engine run in enclosed gine has started.
areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes
may lead to loss of consciousness and death. Diesel engine
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an
If the engine is cold and temperatures are below
odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀
approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃, the start process may be de‐
Unattended vehicle layed somewhat due to automatic preheating.

Do not leave the car unattended with the A message is displayed.


engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten‐
tial source of danger.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
Engine stop
ning, set the parking brake and engage trans‐
mission position P; otherwise, the vehicle may
General information
begin to roll.◀ Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
Frequent starting in quick succession
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting cannot operate the windows and injure them‐
the car and avoid starting the car frequently in selves.◀
quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not
burned or is inadequately burned, and there is Set the parking brake and further secure
the danger of overheating and damaging the the vehicle as required
catalytic converter.◀ Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
and downward inclines, further secure the vehi‐

67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Driving

cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in The indicator lamp lights up in red. The
the direction of the curb.◀ parking brake is set.

Before driving into a car wash Indicator lamp in Canadian models.


To make it possible for the vehicle to roll in an
automatic car wash, follow the information on To set the parking brake, the remote control
Washing in automatic car washes, refer to does not need to be in the ignition lock.
page 305.
Set the parking brake and further secure
Switching off the engine the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
Procedure erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
1. Engage transmission position P with the ve‐ and downward inclines, further secure the vehi‐
hicle stopped. cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb.◀
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Set the parking brake.
While driving
4. Remove the remote control from the ignition
Use while driving:
lock, refer to page 66.
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the button is being pulled.
Parking brake The indicator lamp lights up in red, a sig‐
nal sounds and the brake lamps light up.
The concept
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre‐ Indicator lamp in Canadian models.
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx.
The parking brake can be set manually or auto‐
2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake remains set.
matically:
▷ Manual: by pulling and pushing the switch. Releasing manually
▷ Automatic: by activating Automatic Hold.

Setting manually

Press the button with the brake depressed.

The LED and indicator lamp go out.


Pull the button. The parking brake is set.

68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving Controls

Indicator lamp in Canadian models. Activating

Take the remote control with you


Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot release the parking brake.◀

Automatic Hold

The concept Press the button. The LED in the button lights
This system assists the driver by automatically up and the indication AUTO H appears in the in‐
setting and releasing the brake, such as when strument panel.
moving in stop-and-go traffic. Automatic Hold is activated.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary. If the vehicle is being held by Automatic
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle Hold, the indicator light in the instrument
from rolling backward when driving away. panel also lights up in green.

Indicator lamp in Canadian models.


For your safety
Automatic Hold is deactivated automatically and
the parking brake is set when:
▷ The engine is switched off.
Deactivating
Press the button again, the LED in the button
▷ A door is opened and the driver's safety belt
and the indication AUTO H in the instrument
is unbuckled.
panel go out.
▷ The vehicle is braked to a standstill with the
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
parking brake while driving.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
The indicator lamp switches from green then press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.
to red and the letters AUTO H go out.
When the parking brake is set manually, refer to
Indicator lamp in Canadian models. page 68, Automatic Hold is deactivated auto‐
matically.

Before driving away: Driving


▷ Release the parking brake manually. Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is auto‐
matically secured against rolling when it stops.
▷ Reactivate Automatic Hold.
The indicator lamp lights up in green.
Leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ Indicator lamp in Canadian models.
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
mission and ensure that the parking brake is set.
Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀ Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off.

69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Driving

The brake is released automatically. In addition, secure the vehicle against rolling,
The indicator lamp goes out. e.g. with a wheel chock. Otherwise there is a
danger that the vehicle could roll if parked on a
Before driving into a car wash steep slope.◀
Deactivate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the
Jump-starting and towing, refer to page 302.
parking brake will be set when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary and the vehicle will no longer be able to
roll.◀
Unlocking
1. Open the left-hand side panel in the cargo
area.
Parking
2. Remove the first aid kit and the warning tri‐
The parking brake is automatically set if the en‐
angle. Close the bracket of the warning tri‐
gine is switched off while the vehicle is being
angle.
held by Automatic Hold.
3. Insert the releasing tool or screwdriver, con‐
The indicator lamp changes from green tained in the tool kit under the cargo floor
to red. panel, refer to page 288, at the releasing
point.
Indicator lamp in Canadian models.

The parking brake is not set if the engine is


switched off while the vehicle is coasting to a
halt. Automatic Hold is deactivated.
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot release the parking brake.◀
4. Firmly pull the releasing tool or screwdriver
upward against the mechanical resistance,
Malfunction refer to arrow, until a considerable increase
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the in force is felt and the parking brake is then
parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling clearly heard to release.
using a wheel chock, for example, when leaving 5. Stow the releasing tool or screwdriver,
it. warning triangle, and first aid kit and close
the left side panel in the cargo area.
Releasing the parking brake manually
Have the malfunction corrected
In the event of an electrical power loss or elec‐
trical malfunction, you can release the parking Have the malfunction corrected at the
brake manually. nearest service center or at a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures with
Secure the vehicle against rolling correspondingly trained personnel. If the park‐
Before releasing the parking brake man‐ ing brake has been released manually in re‐
ually, and whenever you park the vehicle with the sponse to a malfunction, only technicians can
parking brake released, ensure that position P of return it to operation.◀
the automatic transmission is engaged. Note
the display in the instrument cluster.

70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving Controls

Following manual release, the actual status of Turn signal, high beams,
the parking brake may deviate from that dis‐
played by the indicator lamp.
headlamp flasher
At a glance
Putting into operation after a power
failure
Putting the parking brake into operation
The parking brake should only be put into
operation again if it was manually released due
to an interruption in the supply of electrical
power. Otherwise the operation of the parking
brake is not ensured and there is a danger of the
vehicle rolling despite the parking brake being
set.◀
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
Procedure
3 Turn signal
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the button with the brake depressed.
Turn signal
The indicator lamp in the instrument
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
cluster goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation. Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever to the re‐
Indicator lamp in Canadian models. sistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in‐
Any noises which occur are normal. Startup may dicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
take several seconds.
Signaling a turn briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.

Triple turn signal activation


Press the lever to the resistance point.
The turn signal flashes three times.
This function can be activated or deactivated:

1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"

71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Driving

3. "Triple turn signal" 4 Cleaning the windshield and headlamps


5 Setting the sensitivity of the rain sensor

Switching on wipers
Press the wiper lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.

Normal wiper speed


The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ Press up once.
rently in use. The system switches to operation in the inter‐
mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.

Washer/wiper system Fast wiper speed


Press up twice or press once beyond the resist‐
Notes ance point.
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen The system switches to normal speed when the
Do not switch on the wipers if they are fro‐ vehicle is stationary.
zen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper
blades and the windshield wiper motor may be Switching off wipers or brief wipe
damaged.◀ Press the wiper lever down, arrow 2.
Do not use the wipers on a dry windshield The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Do not use the wipers on a dry windshield;
otherwise, the wiper blades may wear more rap‐ ▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
idly or become damaged.◀ ▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
At a glance
Rain sensor
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time
between wipes is controlled automatically and
depends on the intensity of the rainfall.
The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield,
directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating the rain sensor

72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving Controls

Activating the rain sensor Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
pump.◀

Windshield washer nozzles


The windshield washer nozzles are heated au‐
tomatically while the engine is running or the ig‐
nition is switched on.

BMW X5: rear window wiper


Press the button, arrow 3.
The LED in the button lights up.

Rain sensor sensitivity


Turn thumbwheel 5 up or down.

Deactivating the rain sensor


Press the button again, arrow 3.
The LED goes out. 1 Intermittent wipe
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes When reverse gear is engaged, the system
switches to continuous operation.
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise, dam‐ 2 Cleaning the rear window
age could be caused by undesired wiper activa‐
tion.◀ Do not use the washing mechanisms
when the washer fluid reservoir is empty

Cleaning the windshield and Do not use washing mechanisms when the
headlamps washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you
will damage the washer pump.◀
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Washer fluid
When the vehicle lighting system is switched on,
the headlamps are cleaned at regular and ap‐ General information
propriate intervals.
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Do not use the washer system at freezing
Antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep
temperatures
it away from sources of ignition.
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
Only keep it in the closed original container and
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
inaccessible to children.
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
reason, use antifreeze. Follow the instructions on the container.◀

73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Driving

Washer fluid reservoir Kickdown


Adding washer fluid Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the accelerator beyond
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
the resistance point at the full throttle position.
cool, and then close the cover completely to
avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot
engine parts.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀
N is Neutral
The vehicle can roll.
N remains engaged after the engine is switched
off if the remote control remains in the ignition
lock. This function can be used in an automatic
car wash, refer to page 305, for example. P is
automatically engaged after approx. 30 minutes.

P Park
The drive wheels are blocked.
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
P is engaged automatically when the following
voir.
conditions are met:
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer
▷ The driver's door is opened while the engine
antifreeze, according to the manufacturer's rec‐
is running, the safety belt is not fastened and
ommendations.
neither the brake pedal nor the accelerator
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain is activated.
the correct mixing ratio.
▷ The engine is switched off unless N is en‐
gaged and the remote control is in the igni‐
Capacity
tion lock.
Approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.
▷ The remote control is removed from the ig‐
nition lock.

Automatic transmission with Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that the trans‐
mission position P is engaged; otherwise, the
Steptronic vehicle may begin to roll.

Transmission positions
Engaging transmission position
D Drive, automatic position ▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐
gaged if the engine is running and the brake
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
pedal is pressed.
ward gears are available.
▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con‐
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
sumption is lowest when you are driving in po‐
otherwise, the shift command will not be
sition D.
executed: shift lock.

74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving Controls

Press on the brake pedal until you start Sport program and manual mode M/S
driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you Activating the Sport program
select a driving position, maintain pressure on
the brake pedal until you are ready to start.◀

Engaging transmission positions D, R,


N

Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐


mission position D.

The Sport program is activated and DS or the


engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, for example S4.
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
This position is recommended for a perform‐
rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
ance-oriented driving style.
When shifting out of P or into R, simultaneously
push the unlock button 1.
Activating manual mode
The engaged transmission position is displayed
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
on the selector lever.
mission position D.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its
Push the selector lever forward or backward.
center position.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
Engaging transmission position P
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. cluster, e.g., M1.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐
ward.
The transmission only shifts up or down if the
rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate. If the
engine speed is too high, the transmission does
not shift down.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
Press button P.
strument panel, followed by the current gear.

Ending the Sport program/manual


mode
Push the selector lever to the right.

75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Driving

D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Displays in the instrument cluster

Shifting gears using the shift paddles


on the steering wheel
The shifting paddles make it possible to quickly
change gears since both hands can remain on
the steering wheel.
▷ If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears while in automatic mode
D, the transmission temporarily switches to
manual mode. The transmission position is displayed and the
▷ If the shift paddles are not used to accelerate engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in
or shift gears for a certain amount of time, manual mode.
the transmission switches back to auto‐
matic mode D.
With the transmission position M/S selected,
the manual mode remains active.

▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.


▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate
engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift
down if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.

76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Displays Controls

Displays
Vehicle equipment Units of measure
To set the respective units of measure, miles or
This chapter describes all series equipment as
km for the odometer and ℃ or ℉ for the external
well as country-specific and special equipment
temperature, refer to page 86.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected rently in use.
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Time, date, external temperature
tems. From radio readiness the external temperature
and the time are displayed.
Set the time, refer to page 85.
Odometer, external
temperature display, clock Retrieving date

1 Knob in the instrument cluster Press the button on turn signal lever upward; the
2 Time, external temperature, and date date appears.

3 Odometer and trip odometer Set the date, refer to page 85.
Pressing the button upward or downward sev‐
Knob in the instrument cluster eral times changes the display between clock,
Press the knob. external temperature, date, and Check Control
messages, refer to page 83.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
External temperature warning
Press the knob for approx. 5 seconds:
If the display drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal
View service requirement display, refer to sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is
page 81 the increased danger of ice.
▷ When the ignition is switched off, the time, Ice on roads
external temperature and odometer are dis‐
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃,
played.
there can be a risk of ice on roads.

77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Displays

Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady Coolant temperature


roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan‐
ger of an accident.◀ A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and
therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi‐
tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis‐
Odometer and trip odometer
play.
Resetting trip odometer:
Check the coolant level, refer to page 285.
With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
the instrument cluster.
Current fuel consumption
When the vehicle is parked
If you still want to view the time, external tem‐
perature and odometer reading briefly after the
remote control has been taken out of the ignition
lock:
Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

Tachometer
Displays the current fuel consumption. You can
check whether you are currently driving in an ef‐
ficient and environmentally-friendly manner.

Engine oil temperature

▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at the low tem‐


perature end. Drive at moderate engine and
vehicle speeds.
Never force the engine speed up into the red ▷ Normal operating temperature: the pointer
warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel is in the middle or in the right half of the tem‐
supply is interrupted to protect the engine. perature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐
perature end. Switch off the engine imme‐
diately and allow it to cool down.

78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Displays Controls

If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes‐ Computer


sage appears on the Control Display.
Check the oil level, refer to page 283. Displaying information on the
instrument panel

Fuel gauge

Press the computer button on the turn signal


lever.
The vehicle inclination may cause the display to
Information is displayed in the instrument clus‐
vary.
ter.
Notes on refueling, refer to page 262.
Overview of the information
Range Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn sig‐
After the reserve range is reached: nal lever displays the information on the instru‐
ment cluster in the following order:
▷ A message is briefly displayed on the Con‐
trol Display. ▷ Range.
▷ The remaining range is shown on the com‐ ▷ Average speed.
puter. ▷ Average fuel consumption.
▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such To set the corresponding units of measure, refer
as when corners are taken rapidly, engine to page 86.
functions are not ensured.
The message appears continuously below a Information in detail
range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Range
Refuel promptly
Displays the estimated cruising range available
At the latest, refuel at a range of with the remaining fuel.
30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function
is not ensured and damage may occur.◀ It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 18 miles/30 km.

Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle was parked and the
engine was switched off manually are not in‐
cluded in the average speed calculations.

79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Displays

With the trip computer, refer to page 80, you ▷ Estimated time of arrival if a destination was
can have the average speed displayed for an ad‐ entered in the navigation system, refer to
ditional distance. page 164.
To reset the average speed: press the button on Displays on the "Trip computer":
the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Average fuel consumption


This is calculated for the period during which the
engine is running.
You can have the average consumption for an‐
other trip displayed, refer to Displays on the
Control Display below.
To reset the average consumption: press the
button on the turn indicator lever for ap‐ ▷ Departure time.
prox. 2 seconds. ▷ Trip duration.
▷ Trip distance.
Displays on the Control Display
Both displays show:
Display the computer or trip computer on the
Control Display. ▷ Average fuel consumption and
▷ Average speed.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
Resetting the values for average speed and
average fuel consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press
the controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm your
selection.

Displays on the "Onboard info":


Resetting the trip computer
Resetting all values:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"

▷ Range.
▷ Distance to destination.

80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Displays Controls

Service requirements Displays

Symbol Function

Service requirements

Engine oil

The remaining driving distance and the date of


the next scheduled service are displayed briefly
immediately after you start the engine or switch
on the ignition.
Roadworthiness test
The current service requirements can be read
out from the remote control by the service spe‐
cialist.
For certain maintenance operations, you can
view the distance remaining or the due date for Front brake pads
that operation in the instrument cluster.

Rear brake pads

Brake fluid
1. With the ignition switched on, press the
knob in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 77, for approx. 5 seconds until the
service requirements are displayed.
2. Press the knob repeatedly to display the in‐
dividual service requirement items. The sequence of displayed service items may
vary. First the data for the next maintenance are
displayed.

81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Displays

Detailed information on service Make sure the date on the Control Display is set
requirements correctly, refer to page 85.
More information on the scope of service re‐ 1. "Vehicle Info"
quired can be displayed on the Control Display.
2. "Vehicle status"
1. "Vehicle Info" 3. "Service required"
2. "Vehicle status" 4. "§ Vehicle inspection"

3. "Service required" 5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.


Required maintenance procedures and legally 6. "Date:"
mandated inspections are displayed.
7. Create the settings.
Additional information can be displayed on each
8. Press the controller to apply the setting. The
entry:
year is highlighted.
Select the entry and press the controller.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
To exit from the menu:
10. Press the controller to apply the setting. The
Move the controller to the left. date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Symbols
Move the controller to the left.
Symbols Description
Automatic Service Request
No service is currently required.
Data regarding the maintenance status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center be‐
The deadline for service or a le‐
fore a service due date.
gally mandated inspection is
approaching. You can check when your service center was
notified.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed. 1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
Entering dates
4. "Last Service Request"
Enter the dates for the required inspections.

82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Displays Controls

Check Control sage and the meaning of the indicator and warn‐
ing lamps.
The concept
Supplementary text messages
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys‐ Addition information, such as on the cause of a
tems monitored. fault or the required action, can be called up via
Check Control.
A Check Control message consists of indicator
and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and, In urgent cases, this information will be shown
in some circumstances, an acoustic signal and as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
text messages at the top of the Control Display.
Symbols
Indicator/warning lamps The following functions can be selected within
the supplementary text message, depending on
the Check Control message.
▷ "Service request"
Contact the service partner.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.

Hiding Check Control messages


The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lamps are checked for proper


functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Press the button in the turn signal lever up or


down.

▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐


played continuously and are not cleared un‐
til the malfunction is eliminated. If several
malfunctions occur at once, the messages
The symbol indicates that Check Control are displayed consecutively.
messages have been stored. The Check Control
These messages can be hidden for approx.
messages can be displayed later.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
Text messages ▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
Display in combination with a symbol in the in‐
strument cluster explain a Check Control mes‐

83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Displays

They are stored and can be displayed again Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops be‐
later. low the set speed limit once by at least
3 mph/5 km/h.
Viewing stored Check Control
messages Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"

1. Press the button on the turn signal lever


downward. "CHECK OK" or the stored
Check Control messages appear on the dis‐
play.
„CHECK OK“ is shown if no messages are
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
present.
displayed.
Check Control messages are accompanied
5. Press the controller.
by text messages on the Control Display.
The speed limit is stored.
2. Press the button to display additional mes‐
sages, the time and external temperature, or
the date.
Applying your current speed as the
limit
Displaying stored Check Control 1. "Settings"
messages 2. "Speed"
1. "Vehicle Info" 3. "Select current speed"
2. "Vehicle status" The system adopts your current speed as the
3. "Check Control" limit.
4. Select the text message.
Activating/deactivating the limit
Messages after trip completion 1. "Settings"
Special messages that were displayed during a 2. "Speed"
trip are displayed again after the ignition is 3. "Warning"
switched off.

Speed limit
Entry of a speed limit which, when reached,
should cause a Check Control message to be
issued.

84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Displays Controls

Settings on the Control 3. "Time:"


Display
Time
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.

Setting the time zone


1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed.
7. Press the controller.
The time is stored.

Setting the time format


3. "Time zone:" 1. "Settings"
4. Select the desired time zone. 2. "Time/Date"
The time zone is stored. 3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
Setting the time
The time format is stored.
1. "Settings"
Date
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.

Setting the date


1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
2. "Time/Date" 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.

85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Displays

Setting the date format Units of measure


1. "Settings"
Setting the units of measure
2. "Time/Date"
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/dis‐
3. "Format:"
tance, temperature, and pressure:
4. Select the desired format.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"

The date format is stored.

Language 3. Select the desired menu item.


4. Select the desired unit.
Setting the language
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
To set the language on the Control Display: rently in use.
1. "Settings"
Brightness
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:" Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:

1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"

4. Select the desired language.


The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.

Setting the voice dialog


Voice dialog for the voice activation system, re‐ 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
fer to page 26. ness is set.
5. Press the controller.

86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Displays Controls

The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐


rently in use.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness control may not be clearly visible.

87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Lamps

Lamps
Vehicle equipment Parking lamps
Switch position : the vehicle lamps light
This chapter describes all series equipment as
up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
describes equipment that may not be found in riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected charged and it would then be impossible to start
special equipment or the country version. This the engine.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
tems. one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
page 90.

At a glance Low beams


Switch position with the ignition switched
on: the low beams light up.

Welcome lamps
When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
position or : the parking and interior
lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐
locked.

0 Lamps off and daytime running lights Activating/deactivating the welcome


lamps
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lights
1. "Settings"
2 Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps
2. "Lighting"
3 Automatic headlamp control, daytime run‐
ning lights, welcome lamps, adaptive light 3. "Welcome light"
control, and High-beam Assistant

Parking lamps/low beams,


headlamp control
General information
If the driver's door is opened while the ignition is
switched off, the exterior lighting is switched off The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
automatically in the following switch settings: rently in use.
0, ,

88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Lamps Controls

Headlamp courtesy delay feature Daytime running lights


The low beams stay lit for a short while after the The daytime running lights light up in posi‐
ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched tion 0, and . After the ignition is
off and the headlamp flasher is switched on. switched off, the parking lamps light up in posi‐
tion .
Setting the duration
1. "Settings" Activating/deactivating
2. "Lighting" 1. "Settings"

3. "Pathway light.: s" 2. "Lighting"


3. "Daytime running lamps"

4. Set the duration.


The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use. rently in use.

Automatic headlamp control


Switch position : the low beams are switched Adaptive light control
on and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twi‐
light or if there is precipitation. The LED next to The concept
the symbol lights up. Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
tion of the road surface.
cause the lights to be switched on.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
The low beams remain switched on independ‐
rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
ent of the ambient lighting conditions when you
the course of the road.
switch on the front fog lamps.
In sharp curves, e.g. serpentines, or during turn‐
Personal responsibility
ing, up to a certain speed one of the two front
The automatic headlamp control cannot fog lamps is switched on as a turning lamp. This
serve as a substitute for your personal judgment provides improved illumination of the area inside
in determining when the lamps should be the curve.
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions. Controls
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you Activating
should always switch on the lamps manually un‐ Switch position with the ignition switched
der these conditions.◀ on.

89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Lamps

The turning lamps are automatically switched Left and right roadside parking lamps
on depending on the steering angle or the use The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
of turn signals.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive Switching on
Light Control does not swivel to the driver's side After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
when the vehicle is at a standstill. down beyond the resistance point for ap‐
When driving in reverse, both turning lamps are prox. 2 seconds, arrow 3.
active. The roadside parking lamps drain the battery.
Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly long
Malfunction periods of time; otherwise, the battery might not
A message is displayed. have enough power to start the engine.
Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos‐ Switching off
sible. Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction
to the pressure point, arrow 3.

Self-leveling headlights
High-beam Assistant
LED headlamps
The self-leveling headlights feature adapts the The concept
light distribution to the contours of the road. When the lights are switched on, this system
The light distribution is lowered on hilltops to automatically switches the high beams on and
avoid blinding oncoming traffic and tilted in de‐ off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on
pressions to increase visibility. the front of the interior rearview mirror. The as‐
sistant ensures that the high beams are
switched on whenever the traffic situation al‐
lows. The driver can intervene at any time and
High beams/roadside parking switch the high beams on and off as usual.
lamps
Activating the High-beam Assistant
1. Turn the light switch to .
2. With the low beams switched on, briefly
push the turn indicator lever in the direction
of the high beam.

1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps

90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Lamps Controls

The indicator lamp in the instrument System limits


cluster lights up. The high beams are
Personal responsibility
switched on and off automatically.
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as
The system responds to light from oncoming
a substitute for the driver's personal judgment
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad‐
of when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐
equate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
ually switch off the high beams in situations
where this is required to avoid a safety risk.◀
Switching the high beams on and off
manually The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
▷ High beams on, arrow 1. in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2. traffic on freeways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres‐
To reactivate the High-beam Assistant, briefly ence of highly reflective signs.
push the turn indicator lever toward the high
▷ At low speeds.
beams.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
Activating/deactivating via iDrive rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
1. "Settings"
▷ If the sensor view field is dirty.
2. "Lighting"
The view field of the sensor is located on the
3. "High beam assistant"
front of the interior rearview mirror.
Do not cover this area with stickers, etc.
Clean the sensor view field with a cloth mois‐
tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.

Front fog lamps


The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ Press the button. The green indicator
rently in use. lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

If the automatic headlamp control, refer to


page 89, is activated, the low beams will come

91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Lamps

on automatically when you switch on the fog To switch off permanently: press the button for
lamps. approx. 3 seconds.
To clear this setting: briefly press the button.

Instrument lighting Reading lamps

Adjust the brightness using the thumbwheel. Press the button.

Reading lamps are located at the front and rear


next to the interior lamps.
Interior lamps
Danger of burns
General information Do not reach into the opening of the lamps;
The interior lamps, footwell lamps, exit lamps, otherwise, there is a risk of burns.◀
trunk lamps, and courtesy lamps are controlled
automatically.
The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the
door handles and illuminate the ground in front
of the doors.
To avoid draining the battery, all lamps inside
the car are switched off about 8 minutes after
the ignition is switched off, Start/Stop button,
refer to page 66.

Switching the interior lamps on and off

Press the button.

92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Safety Controls

Safety
Vehicle equipment describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
This chapter describes all series equipment as special equipment or the country version. This
well as country-specific and special equipment also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also tems.

Airbags

1 Front airbags 3 Side airbags


2 Head airbags

Front airbags ▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.


Front airbags help protect the driver and front ▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in steering wheel rim, holding your hands at
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐ the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
quate restraint. the danger of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible if the airbag is triggered.
Side airbags ▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the jects between an airbag and a person.
side of the body in the chest and lap area. ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
Head airbags
▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover
head. with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not
attach holders such as for navigation instru‐
Protective action ments and mobile phones.
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
collisions. in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can
Information on how to ensure the optimal occur if the front airbag is triggered.
protective effect of the airbags

93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Safety

▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or Automatic deactivation of the front
other objects on the front passenger seat passenger airbags
that are not approved specifically for seats The occupation of the seat is detected by eval‐
with integrated side airbags. uating the impression on the occupied seat sur‐
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐ face of the front passenger seat.
ets, over the backrests. The front and side airbags on the front passen‐
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads ger side are activated or deactivated accordingly
away from the side airbag and do not rest by the system.
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries The indicator lamp above the interior rearview
can occur if the airbags are triggered. mirror shows the current status of the front pas‐
▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system. senger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel. Front passenger airbag indicator lamp below.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐ Leave feet in the footwell
bag cover panels, cover them or modify Make sure that the front passenger keeps
them in any way. his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐ passenger airbags may not function properly.◀
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the Child restraint fixing system in the front
dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the passenger seat
sides of the headliner.◀ Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
Even when all instructions are followed closely, ger seat, refer to the safety notes and instruc‐
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be tions under Children on the front passenger
ruled out in certain situations. seat, refer to page 60.◀

The ignition and inflation noise may lead to


short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐ Malfunction of the automatic
ing impairment in sensitive individuals. deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults, the
In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
front passenger airbags may be deactivated in
and after triggering of the airbags
certain sitting positions. In this case, the indica‐
Do not touch the individual components imme‐ tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights
diately after the system has been triggered; oth‐ up.
erwise, there is the danger of burns.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐ the front passenger airbags are activated and
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by the indicator lamp goes out.
your service center or a workshop that has the
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
necessary authorization for handling explosives.
the person sit in the rear.
Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
To make sure that occupation of the seat cush‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or un‐
ion can be detected correctly:
desired triggering of the airbag, either of which
could result in injury.◀ ▷ Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion pad‐
ding, ball mats or other items to the passen‐
Warnings and information on the airbags are ger seat unless they are specifically recom‐
also found on the sun visors. mended by BMW.

94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Safety Controls

▷ Do not place objects under the seat that Operational readiness of airbag system
could press against the seat from below.

Indicator lamp for the front passenger


airbags

When the ignition is switched on,, refer to


page 66, the warning lamp comes on briefly to
indicate that the entire airbag system and the
belt tensioners are operational.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the ar‐
rangement of the switches and indicator lamps
Airbag system malfunction
may differ somewhat.
▷ The warning lamp does not light up after the
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
ignition is switched on.
bags indicates the operating state of the front
passenger airbags. ▷ Warning lamp remains permanently on.

The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐ Have the airbag system checked without
tivated or deactivated. delay if there is a malfunction
▷ The indicator lamp lights up when a child in In the event of a malfunction in the airbag sys‐
a child restraint fixing system intended for tem, have it checked without delay; otherwise,
the purpose is properly detected on the there is the risk that the system will not function
seat. The airbags on the front passenger as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident
side are not activated. occurs.◀
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The FTM Flat Tire Monitor
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated. The concept
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when The system does not measure the actual infla‐
the seat is empty. However, the airbags on tion pressure in the tires.
the front passenger side are not activated. It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing
The system generally detects children seated in the rotational speeds of the individual wheels
a child seat, especially in the child seats that while moving.
were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and
manufactured. After installing a child seat, make therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐
sure that the indicator lamp for the front pas‐ sponding wheel change. This is detected and
senger airbags lights up. This indicates that the reported as a flat tire.
child seat has been detected and the front pas‐
senger airbags are not activated.

95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Safety

Functional requirements Do not initialize the system when driving with


The system must have been initialized when the snow chains or with a compact wheel.
tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, 1. "Vehicle Info"
reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. In‐
2. "Vehicle status"
itialize the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or 3. "Reset"
wheel change. 4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization with "Reset".
System limits
6. Drive away.
Sudden tire damage
The initialization is completed while driving,
Sudden serious tire damage caused by which can be interrupted at any time.
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
The initialization automatically continues when
vance.◀
driving resumes.
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires can‐
not be detected. Therefore, check the tire infla‐ Indication of a flat tire
tion pressure regularly. The warning lamp lights up red. A
The system could be delayed or malfunction in message appears on the Control Dis‐
the following situations: play. In addition, a signal sounds.
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road pressure.
surface.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels, sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
high lateral acceleration.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
▷ When driving with snow chains.
tires
When driving with a compact wheel, the Flat Tire
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires
Monitor is unable to function.
as provided at the factory, do not continue driv‐
ing. Continuing to drive could cause severe ac‐
Status display cidents.◀
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
whether or not the FTM is active. bility Control is switched on if necessary.

1. "Vehicle Info" Actions in the event of a flat tire


2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor" Run-flat tires
The status is displayed. Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
Initialization
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
The initialization process adopts the set inflation
tire pressures as reference values for the detec‐
tion of a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the inflation pressures.

96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Safety Controls

Continued driving with a flat tire Final tire failure


If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
vers.
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀
If the defective tire continues to lose pres‐
sure, its position will be indicated to you on
the Control Display. Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation
pressure in all four tires. The concept
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is The tire inflation pressure is measured in the
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have four mounted tires. The system notifies you if
been initialized. In this case, initialize the there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
system. more tires.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure: Functional requirements
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire The system must have been reset while the in‐
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable
and the driving style and conditions. signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the Always use wheels with TPM electronics to en‐
possible driving distance is ap‐ sure that the system will operate properly.
prox. 50 miles/80 km. Reset the system after each correction of the
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐ wheel change.
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering System limits
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ Sudden tire damage
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
Because the possible driving distance depends vance.◀
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐ The system does not operate correctly if it has
pending on the driving speed, road conditions, not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be
external temperature, cargo load, etc. indicated despite correct tire inflation pres‐
sures.
Continued driving with a flat tire
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
Drive moderately and do not exceed a tire:
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
▷ If a wheel without TPM electronics is
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a mounted, e.g., compact wheel.
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
▷ When the TPM is disturbed by other sys‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
tems or devices with the same radio fre‐
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐
quency.
erties.◀

97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Safety

Status display Resetting the system


1. "Vehicle Info" Reset the system after each correction of the
2. "Vehicle status" tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
3. "TPM"
The status is displayed. 1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
Status indicator on the Control Display 3. "Reset"
The tire and system status is indicated by the 4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
color of the tires.
5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset".
A change in the tire inflation pressure during
6. Drive away.
driving is taken into account.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
A correction is only necessary if this is indicated
TPM..." is displayed.
by the TPM
After driving for a few minutes, the set tire infla‐
Wheels, green tion pressures are applied as set values. The re‐
setting process is completed automatically as
The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target
you drive. The tires are shown in green and
state.
"TPM active" is shown on the Control Display.
One wheel is yellow The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you
drive away again, the process resumes auto‐
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
matically. Do not reset the system when driving
the indicated tire.
with a compact wheel.
All wheels are yellow If a flat tire is detected while the system is re‐
setting, all tires on the Control Display are dis‐
▷ A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure
played in yellow. The message "Low tire!" is
in several tires.
shown.
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus issues a warning based on Low tire pressure message
the inflation pressures initialized last.
The small warning lamp lights up yel‐
▷ A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys‐
low and the large warning lamp lights
tem is being reset.
up red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, a signal
Wheels, gray sounds.
The system cannot detect a flat tire.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐
Reasons for this may be: flation pressure.
▷ TPM is being reset. ▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the change and thus issues warnings based on
same radio frequency. the inflation pressures initialized last.
▷ Malfunction. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Safety Controls

Do not continue driving without run-flat Because the possible driving distance depends
tires on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐
as provided at the factory, do not continue driv‐ pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
ing. Continuing to drive could cause severe ac‐ external temperature, cargo load, etc.
cidents.◀ Continued driving with a flat tire
When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC Drive moderately and do not exceed a
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec‐ speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
essary. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
Actions in the event of a flat tire duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐
Run-flat tires erties.◀

Maximum speed Final tire failure


You can continue driving with a damaged tire at Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
Continued driving with a flat tire come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐


Message when the system was not
vers.
reset
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the message appears on the Control Dis‐
next opportunity. play.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not The system detected a wheel change but was
have been reset. Reset the system. not reset.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of Warnings regarding the current tire inflation
tire inflation pressure: pressure are not reliable.

The possible driving distance after a loss of tire Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load system.
and the driving style and conditions.
Malfunction
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is ap‐ The small warning lamp flashes in yel‐
prox. 50 miles/80 km. low and then lights up continuously;
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, the larger warning lamp comes on in
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐ yellow. On the Control Display, the
duced lane stability during braking, a longer tires are shown in gray and a message appears.
braking distance, and altered self-steering No flat tire can be detected.
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ Display in the following situations:
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.

99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Safety

▷ If a wheel without TPM electronics is fitted, Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
for instance a compact wheel: have the serv‐ TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
ice center check it if necessary. the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by malfunction indicator is combined with the low
your service center. tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
▷ TPM could not be fully reset. Reset the sys‐
mately one minute and then remain continu‐
tem again.
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the
same radio frequency: after leaving the area malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi‐
of the disturbance, the system automatically cator is illuminated, the system may not be able
becomes active again. to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
Declaration according to NHTSA/ reasons, including the installation of replace‐
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
Systems that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐ tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
or tire inflation pressure label (If your vehicle has continue to function properly.
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la‐
bel, you should determine the proper tire infla‐ Lane departure warning
tion pressure for those tires.).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has The concept
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring This system issues a warning at speeds above
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐ approx. 40 mph/65 km/h if the vehicle is about
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is to leave the lane on roads with lane markings.
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when The steering wheel begins vibrating lightly. The
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you time when the warning is issued may vary with
should stop and check your tires as soon as the current driving situation.
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
The system does not issue a warning if the turn
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
signal is set before leaving the lane.
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the ve‐
hicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's re‐
sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres‐
sure telltale.

100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Safety Controls

Switching on/off ▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.


▷ After the vehicle returns to its lane.
▷ During heavy brake application.
▷ When the turn signal flashes.

System limits
Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the course
Press button 1 on the steering wheel. of the road and the traffic situation.
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering
▷ On: lane markings 2 are lit. wheel; otherwise, you may lose control over the
▷ Off: lane markings 2 go out. vehicle.◀
The system can issue warnings at speeds above The system may not be fully functional in the
approx. 40 mph/65 km/h. following situations:
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐ ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
rently in use.
▷ In the event of worn, poorly visible, merging,
diverging, or multiple lane markings such as
Display
in construction areas.
▷ When the demarcation lines are covered by
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the demarcation lines are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
1 The system is activated. ▷ When the windshield is fogged over, dirty or
2 Arrows: at least one lane marking was de‐ covered by a sticker, etc., in front of the in‐
tected and warnings can be issued. terior rearview mirror.

Issuing a warning Malfunctions


If the vehicle begins leaving the lane and a lane Steering wheel vibration
marking has been detected, the steering wheel
Frequent activation of the steering wheel vibra‐
begins vibrating.
tion causes the system to overheat.
If the turn signal is set before the lane is
The lane departure warning system is deacti‐
changed, a warning is not issued.
vated.
Canceling a warning Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing
the button.
The warning is canceled:

101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Safety

Camera BMW X6

The camera is located on the front of the interior ▷ During normal brake application, the outer
rearview mirror. brake lamps light up.
Keep the area in front of the interior rearview ▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
mirror clear. brake lamps light up in addition.

Brake force display


The concept

BMW X5

▷ During normal brake application, the outer


brake lamps light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lamps light up in addition.

102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving stability control systems Controls

Driving stability control systems


Vehicle equipment This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
This chapter describes all series equipment as
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
well as country-specific and special equipment
for the duration of the full braking.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This Dynamic Stability Control
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ DSC
tems.
The concept
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
Antilock Brake System ABS when driving away and accelerating.

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐ DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
ing. tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject
to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle
The vehicle remains steerable even during full
on a steady course by reducing engine speed
brake applications, thus increasing active
and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.
safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ Adjust your driving style to the situation
gine. An appropriate driving style is always the
responsibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
CBC Cornering Brake Control with DSC.
When braking during curves or when braking Do not reduce the additional safety margin with
during a lane change, driving stability and steer‐ a risky driving style, as otherwise there is a risk
ing response are improved further. of an accident.◀

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF


Electronic brake-force When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
distribution duced during acceleration and when driving in
bends.
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.

Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost. It thus helps to achieve the shortest
possible braking distance during full braking.

103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Driving stability control systems

Deactivating DSC

DSC and DTC deactivated.

Press and hold the button, but not longer than


approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator lamp for
DSC lights up in the instrument cluster and DSC Dynamic Traction Control
OFF is displayed. DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ DTC
trol and DSC are deactivated together.

A message appears on the Control Display.


The concept
Please note any supplementary information that The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which
appears there. forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum forward momen‐
Activating DSC tum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowed
Press the button. snowy roads, but driving stability is limited.
DSC OFF and the indicator lamp in the instru‐ It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
ment cluster go out. ate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un‐
For better control der the following special circumstances:
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐ ▷ When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in
trols the drive forces and brake forces. slush, or on unplowed, snow-covered road
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and surfaces
DTC has failed. ▷ When rocking a vehicle free or starting off in
deep snow, sand, or on loose ground
DSC deactivated:
▷ When driving with snow chains.
The indicator lamp lights up and
DSC OFF appears in the instrument Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
cluster. Traction Control
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
provides maximum traction on loose ground.
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.

104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving stability control systems Controls

Activating DTC xDrive


xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
hicle. The combined effects of xDrive and DSC
further optimize the traction and dynamic driv‐
ing characteristics. The 4-wheel drive system
xDrive variably distributes the drive forces to the
front and rear axle depending on the driving sit‐
uation and prevailing road conditions.

Press the button. Dynamic Performance


TRACTION is displayed in the instrument clus‐ Control
ter and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up.
The concept
Deactivating DTC Dynamic Performance Control optimizes the
handling characteristics of your vehicle when
Press the button again.
starting off, cornering, and during evasive ma‐
TRACTION and the indicator lamp in the instru‐ neuvers.
ment cluster go out.
To achieve this, the system variably distributes
the drive torque of the rear axle to the two rear
For better control
wheels. This further increases the steering pre‐
The indicator lamp flashes: DTC con‐ cision and tracking stability of your vehicle.
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and Display
DTC has failed. The Control Display shows how xDrive and Dy‐
namic Performance Control are distributing the
DTC activated:
drive forces.
The indicator lamp lights up and TRAC‐
1. "Vehicle Info"
TION appears in the instrument cluster.
2. "Torque distribution"

DTC is activated. The current distribution of drive forces is indi‐


cated by arrows pointing to all four wheels.
The highlighted arrows show the drive forces
currently present. The longer an arrow is, the
greater the drive forces in the associated wheel.

105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Driving stability control systems

The transparent arrows indicate the maximum


value the drive forces over the last 10 seconds.

Malfunction
Malfunctions are displayed via Check Control,
refer to page 83.

Hill Descent Control HDC


1 Increasing speed
The concept 2 Pull to the resistance point: reduce the
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐ speed to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h
matically controls vehicle speed on steep down‐ 3 Pull beyond the resistance point: on inclines
hill gradients. The vehicle moves at approxi‐ over 10 %, reduce the speed to ap‐
mately walking speed without braking prox. 3 mph/4 km/h
intervention by the driver.
You can activate the Hill Descent Control at Activating HDC
speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When
moving downhill at speeds below approx.
22 mph/35 km/h, the vehicle reduces its speed
to approximately walking speed, approx.
5 mph/8 km/h and keeps it constant.
Only use HDC in transmission positions D or R.

Increasing or reducing speed


The speed can be changed in the range from
approx. 4 mph/6 km/h to ap‐
Press the button; the LED above the button
prox. 15 mph/25 km/h by pressing the acceler‐
lights up.
ator or brake pedal lightly.
A target speed within the same range can be The LED flashes when the brakes are applied
specified using the lever of the cruise control. automatically.
On inclines over 10 %, you can reduce the speed
to approx. 3 mph/4 km/h. Pull the lever of the Deactivating HDC
cruise control beyond the resistance point, ar‐ Press the button again; the LED goes out. HDC
row 3. is automatically deactivated above approx.
37 mph/60 km/h.

106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving stability control systems Controls

Displays in the instrument cluster Chassis and suspension tuning


Two chassis and suspension tunings are avail‐
able for selection.
▷ Normal:
The comfortable basic setting offers opti‐
mum comfort when traveling.
▷ Sport:
The sporty basic setting offers increased
driving agility.
1 Display for target speed
Selecting chassis and suspension
2 HDC display tuning

Malfunction
HDC is temporarily unavailable in the following
situations due to a high brake temperature:
▷ The LED in the button and the display HDC
go out during HDC operation.
▷ The LED in the button and the HDC display
do not light up when the button is pressed.

Press the button.


Malfunction of driving The system switches between the two chassis
stability control systems and suspension tuning settings.
Adapting your driving style ▷ Sport:
When driving on poor roads, avoid using The LED in the button lights up and SPORT
full throttle or pressing the accelerator beyond is displayed in the instrument panel.
the kickdown point and also avoid heavy brak‐ ▷ Normal:
ing. Otherwise, the drive train may be damaged
The LED in the button goes out.
or accidents can occur.◀
The selection of the chassis and suspension
tuning setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Adaptive Drive
The concept Drive-off assistant
Adaptive Drive reduces the body roll which oc‐
curs when cornering quickly or during fast eva‐ This system supports driving away on gradients.
sive maneuvers. In addition, Adaptive Drive re‐ The parking brake is not required.
duces the steering angle requirement, improves 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
the running comfort, and enhances the dynamic
2. Release the foot brake and drive away with‐
driving characteristics of your vehicle.
out delay.

107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Driving stability control systems

Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may more. This improves the handling of your vehicle
roll back slightly. over the entire speed range.
Driving off without delay In critical situations, the system can make tar‐
geted corrections to the steering angle provided
After releasing the foot brake, start driving
by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle before
without delay, since the drive-off assistant will
the driver intervenes.
not hold the vehicle in place for more than ap‐
prox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling
back.◀
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up yellow and
a message is shown on the Control
Display. The active steering is defec‐
Self-leveling suspension tive or has been temporarily deacti‐
vated. At low speeds, greater steering wheel
The concept
movements are required, whereas at higher
The self-leveling suspension on the rear axle speeds, the vehicle reacts more sensitively to
assures a continuous ground clearance. steering wheel movements. The stability-pro‐
To do so, the height of the vehicle is measured moting intervention can also be deactivated.
by sensors at both rear wheels. Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
If the actual height deviates from the defined
height, such as due to cargo in the vehicle, this Deactivation
difference is compensated very quickly. In ad‐
Active steering deactivates in order to carry out
dition, spring motions resulting from cornering
an initialization. This deactivation is displayed by
or irregularities in the road surface are reduced
means of a message. The initialization can take
to a minimum.
several minutes.
The system works automatically.
If the message does not disappear during the
current trip, have the system checked.
Malfunctions
Malfunctions are displayed via Check Control, Defect
refer to page 83.
In the event of a defect, a corresponding text
message is displayed. Have the system
checked.
Active steering
The concept
The active steering actively varies the steering
angle of the front wheels in relation to the steer‐
ing wheel movements. In addition, it also varies
the steering force required for steering depend‐
ing on the vehicle's speed.
When you are driving in the low speed range, for
instance in a town or when parking, the steering
angle increases, i.e., steering becomes very di‐
rect. In the higher speed range, on the other
hand, the steering angle is reduced more and

108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving comfort Controls

Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment tion, if the vehicle ahead of you slows to a com‐
plete stop, the system can follow this action
This chapter describes all series equipment as within the given scope and can also accelerate
well as country-specific and special equipment from a complete stop if the vehicle ahead of you
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also drives off again shortly thereafter. During brak‐
describes equipment that may not be found in ing, your vehicle brake lamps will automatically
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected illuminate to alert a following driver to take ac‐
special equipment or the country version. This tion. In addition, it may be necessary for your
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ vehicle to downshift the automatic transmission
tems. to maintain the distance setting selected. As
soon as the road in front of you has no moving
vehicles, the system will accelerate to your de‐
Active cruise control sired speed. This set speed is also maintained
on downhill grades, however the vehicle speed
With active cruise control you can select a de‐
can drop below the set speed when driving uphill
sired speed which is then automatically main‐
if the engine output is not sufficient.
tained when driving on open roadways and is
varied to maintain a selected distance setting to Personal responsibility
slower moving vehicles ahead. Active cruise control cannot detect stop
Active cruise control represents a technological signs, red lights, or any object that is stopped or
advance over the familiar cruise control and is a is blocking the road. Active cruise control is not
welcome relief from the constant adjustment of and must not be used as a collision avoidance/
speed that can accompany driving in traffic on warning system. Since this active cruise control
highways or other high-speed thoroughfares. system is a new technology and operates dif‐
Especially on longer trips and in traffic conges‐ ferently from conventional cruise control sys‐
tion, the system can reduce fatigue and tension, tems to which you may be accustomed, it is
while increasing your enjoyment of driving. necessary that you read all of the pages relating
Please use it safely and responsibly. to this system before use. Carefully read and
In addition to holding a steady cruising speed, if observe the information on the system limita‐
you encounter slower vehicles ahead, active tions, refer to page 113, to obtain a good com‐
cruise control will, within limits, adjust your ve‐ mand of the system and its range of applica‐
hicle's speed automatically so that you can flow tions.◀
with the traffic without having to make constant
adjustments. If, for example, while cruising at the Brake pedal feel
selected speed, you begin to approach a slower When the system brakes and you also depress
vehicle ahead of you in the same lane, the sys‐ the brake pedal, a somewhat different braking
tem will reduce your vehicle's speed to the same feel results.
as that of the vehicle ahead to maintain your se‐
lected distance setting. You can vary the follow‐ Professional navigation system
ing distance, which will vary with speed. Based
If the vehicle is equipped with a Professional
on your selected distance setting, the system
navigation system, the system adapts the ac‐
automatically decreases the throttle setting and
celeration and deceleration behavior of the ve‐
lightly applies the brakes if necessary. In addi‐

109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Driving comfort

hicle to the road on which you are currently driv‐ tivated while the vehicle is stationary, refer to
ing. page 112.
To ensure that the system has the latest infor‐
mation on the course of the road, use the most One lever for all functions
recent version of the navigation data.
If the vehicle position is unknown, e.g., if you
have left the region covered by the map, the
navigation system ceases to influence vehicle
behavior.

Applications
Please try the system first during sparse traffic
and clear road conditions so that you can get
used to the system. After you have experience 1 Storing and increasing the desired
and understand the system, only then use it dur‐ speed  110
ing normal traffic. 2 Storing and reducing the desired
As with conventional cruise control systems, ac‐ speed  110
tive cruise control in no way reduces or substi‐ 3 Interrupting  111 or deactivating  112 the
tutes for the driver's own personal experience, system
responsibility, alertness and awareness in ad‐
4 Retrieving the stored desired speed and dis‐
justing speed, braking or otherwise controlling
tance  112 or driving away  112
the vehicle. The driver should decide when to
use the system on the basis of road, traffic, vis‐ 5 Selecting the distance to the vehicle
ibility, and weather conditions. Active cruise ahead  111
control is intended for use on highway-type
roadways where traffic is moving relatively Storing the current speed
smoothly as well as in slow-moving traffic con‐
Push the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, arrow 2.
gestion. Do not use the system in city driving; in
complex driving situations; heavy traffic such as
during rush hour; on curvy, winding roads, slip‐
pery roads or roads with sharp curves such as
highway off-ramps; during inclement weather
such as snow, strong rain or fog; or when enter‐
ing interchanges, service/parking areas or toll
booths. It is also important to regulate your ve‐
hicle's speed and distance setting within appli‐
cable legal limits. Always be ready to take action
or apply the brakes if necessary, especially when
The system stores the current vehicle speed. It
the system is actively following a vehicle in front
is indicated on the speedometer and briefly in
of you. Otherwise, driving conditions can result
the instrument panel.
which lead to a violation of the law or elevated
risk of an accident.
The minimum initial activation speed is
20 mph/ 30 km/h, and the maximum speed is
110 mph/ 180 km/h. The system can also be ac‐

110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving comfort Controls

Increasing desired speed Distance 2


Press or briefly push the lever up to or beyond
the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired
speed is displayed.
The displayed speed is stored and the vehicle
Distance 3
reaches the stored speed if the road is clear.
▷ With each activation to the resistance point,
the desired speed increases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
Distance 4, furthest
▷ With each activation beyond the resistance
point, the desired speed increases by a max‐ This distance is set when you ac‐
imum of 5 mph/10 km/h. tivate the system.

Reducing the desired speed


Pull the lever, arrow 2, until the desired speed is Selecting an appropriate distance
displayed. Use good judgement to select the appro‐
The functions are the same as those when in‐ priate following distance given road conditions,
creasing the desired speed. traffic, applicable laws and State driving recom‐
mendations for safe following distance. Other‐
Selecting the distance wise, a violation of the law or risk of an accident
could result.◀

Interrupting the system

▷ Press the rocker down briefly:


Increase the distance.
▷ Press the rocker up briefly:
Press the lever up or down and additionally de‐
Decrease the distance. press the brake if the vehicle is stationary. The
mark in the speedometer changes color and the
The selected distance is displayed in the instru‐
distance indicator goes out.
ment panel.
In addition, the system is interrupted:
Distance display
▷ When the brakes are applied.
Distance 1, closest ▷ When the transmission position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.

111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Driving comfort

▷ When DSC is activated If you are standing behind a vehicle with your
▷ When the safety belt and the driver's door brake pedal depressed and the system is deac‐
are opened while the vehicle is stationary. tivated or interrupted:

▷ When the system has not detected objects 1. Select the desired speed using the lever, ar‐
for an extended period, e.g., on a road with row 1 or arrow 2, or press button 4 to retrieve
very little traffic without road edge line mark‐ a stored speed.
ings. 2. Release the brake pedal.
▷ The radar sensor is dirty. 3. When the vehicle ahead of you drives away,
press on the accelerator briefly or press but‐
Active intervention if the system is inter‐ ton 4.
rupted
If the system is interrupted, actively intervene by Deactivating the system
braking and, if necessary, with evasive maneu‐ ▷ When driving, press the lever up or down
vers; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐ twice.
dent occurring.◀
▷ When stationary, do the same while de‐
pressing the brake pedal.
Calling up the stored desired speed and
▷ Switch off the ignition.
distance
The displays go out, and the stored desired
While driving speed and distance are deleted.
Press button 4, refer to page 110. All of the dis‐
plays in the instrument panel lights up. Displays in instrument cluster

While standing
Before leaving the vehicle
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine
running, engage position P of the automatic
transmission and apply the parking brake. Oth‐
erwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀

If a vehicle detected ahead of you slows to a halt


and your vehicle is also brought to a halt by the 1 Stored desired speed
system:
▷ Green: the system is active.
▷ If the vehicle ahead of you drives away, your
▷ Orange: the system is interrupted.
vehicle accelerates automatically as long as
mark 1 for the desired speed in the speed‐ 2 Lights up yellow: vehicle detected ahead
ometer is green. Display also used for warnings, please read
▷ If the vehicle ahead of you drives away when all information on warnings.
mark 1 is orange, depress the accelerator 3 Selected distance to vehicle ahead The in‐
briefly or press button 4.Rolling bars in the dicator lights up as soon as the system is
distance indicator 3 mean that the vehicle activated.
ahead of you has driven away. The indicator lights up as soon as the sys‐
tem is activated.

112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving comfort Controls

The bars roll: the vehicle in front of you has Dirty or covered sensor
driven off A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the detec‐
4 Brief display of stored desired speed tion of vehicles.
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐
If the display --- mph/---km/h appears briefly, move layers of snow and ice carefully.
the conditions necessary for operation may cur‐
▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar sen‐
rently not be met.
sor.
Warning lamps
Malfunction
Display 2 flashes red and a signal The system cannot be activated if the radar sen‐
sounds. sor is not aligned correctly. Misalignment may
The system requests that the you be caused by damage incurred during parking,
intervene by braking and carrying for example.
out evasive maneuvers, if necessary. The sys‐
tem cannot independently restore the distance For US owners only
to the vehicle ahead. The transmitter and receiver units comply with
This display does not relieve the driver of the part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
responsibility to adapt his or her desired driving Commission regulations. Operation is governed
speed and style to the traffic conditions. by the following:
FCC ID:
Display 2 flashes yellow.
▷ OAYARS3-A
The conditions necessary for oper‐
ation of the system are no longer Compliance statement:
met, e.g., due to ABS or DSC inter‐ This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
vention. The system applies the brakes until you Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
actively assume control. conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
Radar sensor ence, and
▷ This device must accept any interference
Position received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.

System limits

Speed range
Best results are achieved when using the sys‐
The radar sensor is integrated in the bumper. tem on well-developed roads and highways.
The desired speed can be selected between
20 mph/30 km/h and 110 mph/180 km/h.
The system can also be activated when station‐
ary.

113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Driving comfort

Comply with the legal speed limit in every situa‐ Swerving vehicles
tion when using the system.

Detection range

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected


until it is completely within the same lane as your
vehicle.
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited. Two- Swerving vehicles
wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you for in‐ If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
stance might not be detected. swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
Limited detection capacity tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
Because of the limits to the detection ca‐ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
pacity, you should be alert at all times so that you when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehi‐
can intervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, cle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the
there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ system requests that the driver intervene by
braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if
Deceleration necessary. Take action yourself, otherwise
there is a risk of an accident.◀
The system does not decelerate when a sta‐
tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g.,
a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of traffic Unexpected lane change
congestion.
The system also does not respond to:
▷ Pedestrians or similarly slow road users.
▷ Red traffic lights.
▷ Stationary objects.
▷ Cross traffic.
▷ Approaching traffic.
No warnings
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves
A warning may not be issued when ap‐ into another lane from behind a stopped vehicle,
proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐ you yourself must react, as the system does not
stacle. Take action yourself, otherwise there is react to stopped vehicles.
a risk of an accident.◀

114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving comfort Controls

Cornering Driver interventions and your


responsibility
Your actions have priority at all times. When you
press on the accelerator pedal while driving, au‐
tomatic braking is not performed and the bars in
the distance display go out until you lift your foot
from the accelerator pedal. Once you release the
accelerator pedal, the desired speed is achieved
again on clear roads or the selected distance to
the vehicle ahead is maintained.

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the Making braking possible
speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although Anytime the driver presses down on the
curves cannot be anticipated in advance. There‐ accelerator pedal, any braking action by the sys‐
fore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed. tem is interrupted and the distance indicator
In tight curves, situations may result due to the goes out until the pedal is fully released. As soon
restricted detection range of the system in as you fully release the accelerator, the system
which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be will again control your cruising speed and dis‐
detected at all, or not until after a considerable tance setting. While driving with the system ac‐
delay. tivated, resting your foot on the acelerator pedal
will cause the system not to brake even if nec‐
essary. Be certain that floormats or other ob‐
jects on the vehicle floor do not interfere with
movement of the acccelerator pedal.◀

Limits of automatic braking


While active cruise control is capable of
braking your vehicle automatically when you ap‐
proach a slower vehicle ahead, it is important to
be aware that the ability of the system to apply
When approaching a curve, the system may re‐ the brakes is also limited, e.g. when you reduce
act briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to your desired speed sharply. lt uses only a portion
the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of the of braking system capacity and does not utilize
vehicle by the system can be compensated for the full capacity of the vehicle braking system.
by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator Therefore, the system cannot decrease your
pedal is released, the system becomes active speed for large differences in speed between
again and independently controls the speed. your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Examples:
when you approach a vehicle traveling at a much
lower speed than your own speed such as ap‐
Driving away proaching a toll booth or when a much slower
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive vehicle cuts in front of you at close range.◀
away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines, with
a heavy trailer or behind bumps in the road.

115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Driving comfort

Cruise control The car's current speed is stored and main‐


tained. It is displayed on the speedometer and
The concept briefly in the instrument cluster.
The system is functional at speeds beginning at On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. maintain the set speed if current engine power
output is insufficient. If the engine braking effect
The speed specified using the lever on the
is insufficient on downhill slopes, the system will
steering column is maintained.
brake the vehicle slightly.
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking action is insufficient. Increasing desired speed
Do not use cruise control Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance
Do not use the system if unfavorable con‐ point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed
ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant is reached.
speed, for instance: ▷ Each time the lever is pressed to the point of
▷ On curvy roads. resistance, the desired speed increases by
approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on
resistance point, the desired speed is in‐
a loose road surface.
creased by up to 5 mph/10 km/h.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle
The system stores and maintains the speed.
and cause an accident.◀
Accelerating using the lever
One lever for all functions
Accelerating slightly:
Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1,
until the desired speed is reached.
Accelerating significantly:
Press the lever beyond the resistance point, ar‐
row 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the
accelerator pedal. The system stores and main‐
tains the speed.
1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerat‐
ing Decreasing speed
2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler‐ Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point
ating or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
displayed.
3 Interrupting and deactivating the system
▷ Each time the lever is pulled to the resist‐
4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand
ance point, the desired speed is decreased
by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
Maintaining current speed ▷ Each time the lever is pulled beyond the re‐
Push, arrow 1, or pull, arrow 2, the lever to the sistance point, the desired speed is reduced
resistance point. by up to 5 mph/10 km/h until the minimum
speed of 20 mph/30 km/h is achieved.

116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving comfort Controls

The system stores and maintains the speed. ▷ Green: the system is active.
▷ Orange: the system is interrupted.
Interrupting the system
2 Selected desired speed appears briefly
Press the lever up or down, arrow 3: display 1 in
the speedometer changes color, refer to If the display --- mph or --- km/h appears briefly,
page 117. conditions may not be adequate to operate the
In addition, the system is interrupted: system.
▷ When the brakes are applied. Call up Check Control messages, refer to
▷ When the transmission position D is disen‐ page 84.
gaged.
Malfunction
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated. The warning lamp lights up. The sys‐
▷ When DSC or ABS is intervening. tem is malfunctioning or has failed.
A message appears on the Control
Warning lamp Display. More information, refer to page 83.

The warning lamp lights up if cruise


control has been deactivated auto‐
matically, e.g., by a control interven‐ Park Distance Control PDC
tion of the DSC. A message appears on the Con‐
trol Display. The concept
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the
Resuming cruising speed backup camera, refer to page 120, can be
switched on.
Press button 4:
PDC supports you when parking. A slow ap‐
The stored speed is resumed and maintained.
proach to an object in front of or behind your ve‐
hicle is announced by:
Deactivating the system
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Press the lever upward or downward twice,
arrow 3. ▷ Visual display.
▷ Switch off the ignition.
Measurement
The stored speed is cleared.
Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors
in the bumpers.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
▷ By the front sensors and two rear corner
sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.

1 Stored desired speed

117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Driving comfort

System limits ▷ In large buildings with right angles and


smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages.
Check the traffic situation as well
▷ In heavy exhaust.
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐ ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
tion. Check the traffic situation around the vehi‐ sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident cleaners or neon lights.
could result from road users or objects located
outside of the PDC detection range. Switching on automatically
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle With the engine running or the ignition switched
may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal on, shift the selector lever into position R.
tone.◀
Switching off automatically when
Avoid driving quickly with PDC driving forward
Avoid approaching an object quickly. The system switches off when a certain distance
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet or speed is exceeded.
active. Switch on the system again if necessary.
For technical reasons, the system may other‐
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀ Switching on/off manually

Limits of ultrasonic measurement


The detection of objects can reach the physical
limits of ultrasonic measurement, for instance:
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With low objects.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can Press the button.
move into the blind area of the sensors before or ▷ On: the LED lights up.
after a continuous tone sounds. ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may not
be detected. Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
False warnings tone is sounded that indicates the position of the
PDC may issue a warning under the following object. For example, if an object is detected to
conditions even though there is no obstacle the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds
within the detection range: from the left rear speaker.
▷ In heavy rain. The shorter the distance to the object becomes,
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in the shorter the intervals.
ice. If the distance to a detected object is less than
▷ When sensors are covered in snow. approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
▷ On rough road surfaces.

118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving comfort Controls

If objects are located both in front of and behind Image on the Control Display
the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is
sounded. Switching on the rear view camera
The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx. using iDrive
3 seconds: With PDC activated:
▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that "Rear view camera"
is detected by only one of the corner sen‐ The image of the rear view camera is displayed.
sors. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
▷ If moving parallel to a wall. rently in use.
The signal tone is switched off:
Malfunction
▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
▷ When transmission position P is engaged.

Volume
You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone,
refer to page 185.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
A Check Control message, refer to page 83, is
Visual warning displayed in the instrument cluster.
The approach to an object can be shown on the
Control Display. Objects that are farther away The areas in front of and behind the vehicle ap‐
are displayed on the Control Display before a pear in shaded form on the Control Display. PDC
signal tone sounds. has failed. Have the system checked.
To ensure full operability:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and main‐
tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Surround View
The display appears as soon as PDC is acti‐ The concept
vated. Surround View encompasses the following sys‐
tems:
If the last image selected was the rear view cam‐
era, this is displayed again. To switch to PDC: ▷ Backup camera, refer to page 120.
"Switch off rear view camera" ▷ Top View, refer to page 122.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ ▷ Side View, refer to page 124.
rently in use.

119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Driving comfort

It provides assistance when parking and ma‐ Switching on/off manually


neuvering and at blind driveways and intersec‐
tions.

Rear view camera


The concept
The rear view camera assists you when parking
and maneuvering in reverse. To accomplish this,
the region behind your vehicle is shown on the
Press the button.
Control Display.
Press the button.
System limits ▷ On: the LED lights up.
Check the traffic situation as well ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ If PDC is displayed, switch on the backup cam‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident era via the iDrive, refer to page 119.
could result from road users or objects located
outside the picture area of the backup camera.◀ Assistance functions

Detection of objects Functional requirement


High, protruding objects such as ledges ▷ Rear view camera is switched on.
may not be detected by the backup camera.◀ ▷ Tailgate is completely closed.

Switching on automatically Pathway lines


With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, shift the selector lever into position R.
The image of the rear view camera is displayed
when the system has been switched on using
iDrive.

Switching off automatically when


driving forward
The system switches off when a certain distance
or speed is exceeded. ▷ Can be displayed in the image of the rear
Switch on the system again if necessary. view camera when the transmission is in re‐
verse.
▷ Help estimate the required amount of space
when parking and maneuvering on a flat road
surface.
▷ Depend on the current steering angle and
are continuously adapted to movements of
the steering wheel.

120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving comfort Controls

Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer to 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
page 121. the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
Turning lines

▷ Can be displayed in the image of the rear Obstacle marking


view camera.
▷ Show the path of the smallest turning circle
on a flat road surface.
▷ When the steering wheel is turned, only one
turning line is displayed.

Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer to


page 121.

Parking using pathway and turning ▷ Three-dimensionally shaped markings can


lines be displayed in the image of the rear view
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning lines camera.
lead into the margins of the parking space.
Their color gradation corresponds to the mark‐
ings in PDC. This helps estimate the distance to
the object pictured.
Show the obstacle marking via the iDrive, refer
to page 121.

Activating assistance functions


Several assistance functions can be active at the
same time.

Showing the parking aid lines


"Parking aid lines"
Pathway and turning lines are displayed.

Showing the obstacle marking


"Obstacle marking"

121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Driving comfort

Three-dimensionally-shaped markings are dis‐ Top View


played.
The concept
Image on the Control Display
Top View assists you when parking and maneu‐
vering. To accomplish this, the door region and
Switching on the rear view camera
road surface region are shown on the Control
using iDrive
Display.
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera" Detection
The image of the rear view camera is displayed. Detection is carried out by two cameras
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ integrated into the exterior mirror and the rear
rently in use. view camera.
The range is:
Brightness
▷ Approx. 7 ft/2 m to the side.
With the rear view camera switched on:
▷ Approx. 7 ft/2 m to the rear.
1. Select the symbol. Obstacles up to the height of the exterior mirrors
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting are thus detected in a timely fashion.
is reached and press the controller.
System limits
Contrast Top View cannot be used in the following situa‐
With the rear view camera switched on: tions:

1. Select the symbol. ▷ With a door open.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting ▷ With the tailgate open.
is reached and press the controller. ▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
▷ In poor light.
Camera
The arrows next to the vehicle are displayed in a
shaded form on the Control Display and a sym‐
bol appears at the corresponding location on the
vehicle.
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside the picture area of the cameras.◀

The lens of the rear view camera is under the


grasping lip of the tailgate. Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
The presence of dirt can impair image quality. running.
Clean the lens with a moist, nonabrasive cloth.
The images from Top View and PDC are dis‐
played when the system has been switched on
using iDrive.

122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving comfort Controls

Switching off automatically when "Rear view camera" Select the symbol on
driving forward the Control Display.
The system switches off when a certain distance The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
or speed is exceeded. rently in use.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Image on the Control Display
Switching on/off manually
Switching on the rear view camera
using iDrive
With Top View activated:
"Rear view camera"
The image of the rear view camera is displayed.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.

Brightness
Press the button. With Top View switched on:

▷ On: the LED lights up. 1. "Brightness"


▷ Off: the LED goes out. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
If Top View is displayed, switch on the backup
camera via the iDrive, refer to page 122.
Contrast
Visual warning With Top View switched on:
The approach to an object can be shown on the 1. "Contrast"
Control Display. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
When the distance to an object is small, the PDC is reached and press the controller.
display correspondingly shows a red bar in front
of the vehicle. Displaying turning lines and pathway
lines
▷ The static, red turning line shows the lateral
space required when the wheel is fully
turned.
▷ The variable, green pathway lines assist you
in estimating the amount of lateral space ac‐
tually required.
The pathway lines depend on the current
steering angle and are continuously
The display appears as soon as Top View is ac‐ adapted to movements of the steering
tivated. wheel.
"Parking aid lines"
If the last image selected was the rear view cam‐
era, this is displayed again. To switch to Top Turning lines and pathway lines are displayed.
View:

123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Driving comfort

Cameras Switching off automatically when


driving forward
The system switches off when a certain distance
or speed is exceeded.
Switch on the system again if necessary.

Switching on/off manually

The lenses of the Top View cameras are on the


undersides of the exterior mirror housings.

The presence of dirt can impair image quality.


Clean the lens with a moist, nonabrasive cloth.

Side View Press the button.

The concept Image on the Control Display


Side View provides an early look at cross traffic The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
at blind driveways and intersections. Road users on the Control Display.
concealed by obstacles to the left and right of
the vehicle can only be detected from the driv‐
er's seat at the last minute. To improve visibility,
two cameras in the front of the vehicle record the
traffic situation on each side.

System limits
The cameras capture a maximum range of
330 ft/100 m.

Display Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the


position of the front of the vehicle.
The images from both cameras are shown si‐
multaneously on the Control Display.
Brightness
Check the traffic situation as well
With the Side View switched on:
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle on blind driveways and intersections with 1. "Brightness"
your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could re‐ 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
sult from road users or objects located outside is reached and press the controller.
the picture area of the Side View cameras.◀

124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving comfort Controls

Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
1. "Contrast"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.

Cameras

The two camera lenses are located on the sides


of the bumper.
The presence of dirt can impair image quality. Switching on/off
Clean the lens, refer to page 308. Press the button.

Display visibility
Head-up Display
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
The concept play is influenced by:

This system projects important information into ▷ Certain sitting positions.


the driver's field of vision, e.g., navigation in‐ ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
structions. play.
In this way, the driver can get information with‐ ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
out averting his or her eyes from the road. ▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐
tings.

125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Driving comfort

Display The basic setting can be adjusted manually.

1. "Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
The brightness is adjusted.
With the low beams switched on, the brightness
can also be adjusted with the thumbwheel of the
instrument lighting.
1 Navigation instructions The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
2 Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go func‐ rently in use.
tion
3 Lane departure warning Height adjustment
4 Cruise control/desired speed 1. "Settings"
5 Current speed 2. "Head-up display"
3. "Height"
The Check Control messages are displayed
briefly if needed. 4. Turn the controller.
The height is adjusted.
Selecting displays in the Head-up The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
Display rently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-up display" Special windshield
3. "Displayed information" The windshield is part of the system.

4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up The shape of the windshield makes it possible
Display. to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double images
from being displayed.
Therefore, have the special windshield replaced
by a service center only.

The settings are stored for the remote control


currently in use.

Setting the brightness


The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient light.

126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Climate Controls

Climate
Vehicle equipment describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
This chapter describes all series equipment as special equipment or the country version. This
well as country-specific and special equipment also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also tems.

At a glance

1 Air toward the windshield and side windows 3 Air to footwell


2 Air for the upper body 4 Automatic climate control with 2-zone con‐
trol  128

127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Climate

Automatic climate control with 4-zone con‐


trol  132

Automatic climate control with 2-zone control

1 Seat heating and ventilation, driver's ▷ Accessing setting for ventilation tem‐
side  52 perature on the Control Display
2 Temperature, left side of passenger com‐ 8 Switching cooling function on/off manually
partment 9 Automatic recirculated air control/recircu‐
3 AUTO program lated air mode
4 Temperature, right side of passenger com‐ 10 Manual air volume, switching off automatic
partment climate control, residual heat
5 Maximum cooling 11 Rear window defroster
6 Seat heating and ventilation, front passen‐ 12 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
ger side  52 sation
7 Passenger side 13 Air grill for interior temperature sensor,
▷ Manual air distribution please keep clear and unobstructed
14 Driver's side
▷ Manual air distribution
▷ Accessing setting for ventilation tem‐
perature on the Control Display

The current setting for manual air distribution is Most of these settings are stored for the remote
displayed on the Control Display. control currently in use, Personal Profile set‐
tings, refer to page 31.
Comfortable interior climate
The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis‐ AUTO program
tribution and air volume for virtually all condi‐ Press the button.
tions, refer to AUTO program below. Select a
Air volume, air distribution, and
comfortable interior temperature only.
temperature are controlled auto‐
The following sections contain more detailed in‐ matically.
formation on the available setting options.

128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Climate Controls

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO 3. "Driver ventilation" or "Front passenger


intensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐ ventilation"
rected to the windshield, side windows, upper 4. Turn the controller to adjust the tempera‐
body, and into the footwell. ture.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐ ▷ Blue: colder
cally with the AUTO program.
▷ Red: warmer
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program in such a way that window
condensation is prevented as much as possible.
To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribution.

Intensity of the AUTO program


Pressing the AUTO button repeatedly adjusts
the intensity of the AUTO program. The se‐
lected intensity, SOFT, MEDIUM or INTENSIVE,
appears on the display of the automatic climate Defrosting and defogging windows
control.
Press the button.
Temperature Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
Turn the wheel to set the desired
windows.
temperature.
The automatic climate control ach‐ For this purpose, also switch on the cooling
ieves this temperature as quickly as function.
possible, if necessary with the maximum cooling
or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant. Rear window defroster
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐ Press the button.
perature settings. The automatic climate control The rear window defroster switches off
will not have sufficient time to adjust the set automatically after a certain period of time.
temperature. Depending on the vehicle equipment, upper
Maximum heating power can be obtained with wires are used as an antenna and are not part of
the highest setting, regardless of the external the rear window defroster.
temperature.
At the lowest setting, cooling is continuous, re‐ Air volume, manual
gardless of the external temperature.
You can vary the air volume by pressing
Adjusting the ventilation temperature on the corresponding side. You can re‐
activate the automatic mode for the air volume
This function can be used to adjust the air tem‐ with the AUTO button.
perature for the upper body region.

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"

129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Climate

Manual air distribution Depending on the weather, the windshield may


The air flow can be guided into the vehicle inte‐ fog up briefly when the engine is started.
rior, separately for the driver's and front passen‐ The cooling function is switched on automati‐
ger side, using one of the following programs: cally with the AUTO program.
▷ Upper body region. When using the automatic climate control, con‐
▷ Upper body region and footwell. densation water, refer to page 154, develops
that exits underneath the vehicle.
▷ Footwell.
▷ Driver's side: in addition, the windshield, Maximum cooling
side windows, and footwell.
Press the button.
Selecting program The system is set to the lowest
temperature, maximum air volume
Press the button repeatedly until the
and recirculated-air mode.
desired program is shown on the Con‐
trol Display. Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐
gion. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷ At an external temperature of approx.
32 ℉/0 ℃.
▷ When the engine is running.

Automatic recirculated air mode/


recirculated air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
1 Air toward the windshield and side windows tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
2 Air for the upper body rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently within
3 Air to footwell
the vehicle.
Pressing the AUTO button cancels the manual Press the button repeatedly to select
air distribution settings. an operating mode:
The automatic mode for the air volume remains
effective with manual air distribution. ▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐
Cooling function trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out‐
The passenger compartment can only be side air and controls the shutoff automati‐
cooled with the engine running. cally.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated air mode: the
Press the button.
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
The air is cooled and dehumidified and manently blocked.
– depending on the temperature setting –
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
warmed again.
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO but‐
The cooling function helps to prevent conden‐ ton to utilize the condensation sensor. Make
sation on the windows or to remove it quickly. sure that air can flow onto the windshield.

130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Climate Controls

Continuous recirculated-air mode Switching on


The recirculated air mode should not be Press any button to switch the automatic cli‐
used for an extended period of time, as the air mate control back on.
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.◀
Front ventilation
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the
interior.

Functional requirement
▷ Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been
switched off.
▷ Warm engine.
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and
▷ External temperature below 77 ℉/25 ℃. close the air vents
2 Use the lever to change the direction of the
Switching on
air flow
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Press the right-hand button. Avoiding injury
Do not drop any foreign objects into the air
vents, otherwise these could be catapulted out‐
wards and lead to injuries.◀
REST appears on the display of the automatic
climate control when the residual heat utilization
is switched on. Ventilation for cooling
From radio readiness the interior temperature, Adjust the vents to direct the flow of cool air in
the air volume and the air distribution can be set. your direction, for instance if the interior has be‐
come too warm.
Switching off
Draft-free ventilation
You can select the lowest blower speed by
pressing and holding the left side. Pressing Set the air vents so that the air flows past you
again switches off the residual heat utilization. and is not directed straight at you.
REST disappears from the display of the auto‐
matic climate control.

Switching on/off the automatic climate


control

Switching off
With the blower at its lowest setting,
press the left side of the button to
switch off the automatic climate control.

131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Climate

Ventilation in rear temperatures. To do this, turn thumbwheel 1 to‐


ward the rear and switch on the blower, button 2.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the in‐
coming air.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.
The service center replaces this combined filter
1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and during routine maintenance.
close the air vents More information can be found in the service re‐
2 Use the lever to change the direction of the quirements display, refer to page 81.
air flow

BMW X5: heating and ventilation, 3rd Automatic climate control


row seats with 4-zone control
The air in the area of the 3rd row seats can be
heated or recirculated. Air vents are located in Front operation
the storage compartment area between the Corresponds to the operation of automatic cli‐
seats and in the footwell of the 3rd row seats. mate control with 2-zone control, refer to
page 128.

Rear operation
The control unit is located in the center console
in the rear.

1 Thumbwheel
▷ Activating heating and distributing air in
footwell:
Turn toward front
▷ Distributing air in storage compartment 1 Temperature, left rear seating area
area between seats:
2 AUTO program
Turn toward rear
3 Display
2 Button for switching on the blower: LED is lit
4 Temperature, right rear seating area
The heating is not ready for operation without 5 Seat heating, right rear seat
switching on the blower. After the heating is
switched off, the blower can be used to recircu‐
late the air within the vehicle, for instance at high

132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Climate Controls

6 Air volume, manual The automatic climate control achieves this


temperature as quickly as possible regardless of
7 Seat heating, left rear seat
the season, using maximum cooling or heating
The current setting for the temperature and the power if necessary, and then maintains it.
air flow rate is shown on display 3. When switching between different temperature
settings in rapid succession, the automatic cli‐
Activation/deactivation mate control does not have sufficient time to
1. "Settings" adjust the set temperature.

2. "Climate"
Air volume, manual
3. "Rear climate control"
The air flow rate can be varied by press‐
4. Select the desired settings. ing on the corresponding side. The au‐
tomatic mode for the air flow rate can be
switched on again using the AUTO button.

Switching off rear automatic climate


control
With the blower at its lowest setting,
press the left side of the button to
switch off the automatic climate control.

The rear automatic climate control cannot be The automatic climate control can also be
operated if the front automatic climate control is switched off with iDrive. To switch on the auto‐
switched off. With the defrost windows and matic climate control again, the system must
eliminate condensation function activated, the first be reactivated, refer to Activating/deacti‐
rear automatic climate control is also not ready vating.
for operation.
The system is switched on again by pressing
any button of the rear automatic climate control.
AUTO program
The AUTO program automatically Ventilation in rear
sets the air distribution toward the
upper body and in the footwell, as
well as the air flow rate. It also
adapts your instructions for the
temperature to outside influences throughout
the year.

Temperature
Set the desired temperature indi‐
vidually on the left and right side. 1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and
close the air vents
2 Thumbwheels to adjust temperature in up‐
per body region; can be adjusted separately
for left and right:

133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Climate

▷ Blue: colder Switching on/off directly


▷ Red: warmer 1. "Settings"
3 Use the lever to change the direction of the 2. "Climate"
air flow 3. "Activate parked-car vent."

BMW X5

The symbol on the automatic climate control


flashes if the system is switched on.
1 Use the lever to change the direction of the
air flow
Preselecting activation times
1. "Settings"
2 Thumbwheel to smoothly open and close air
vents 2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
For ventilation of the 3rd row seats, refer to
page 132. 4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"

Parked-car ventilation
The concept
The parked-car ventilation blows air into the
passenger compartment to lower interior tem‐
peratures.
The system can be switched on and off at any
external temperature, either directly or by using 5. Set the desired time.
a preset switch-on time. It remains switched on The symbol on the automatic climate control
for 30 minutes. lights up when the switch-on time is activated.
Since the system uses a substantial amount of The symbol on the automatic climate control
electrical current, refrain from activating it twice flashes when the system has been switched on.
in succession without allowing the battery to be The system will only be switched on within the
recharged in normal operation between use. next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reactivated.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
They can be operated via iDrive.

134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Interior equipment Controls

Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment system being operated, the system is generally
compatible with the Universal Garage Door
This chapter describes all series equipment as Opener.
well as country-specific and special equipment
If you have any questions, please contact:
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in ▷ Your service center.
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
special equipment or the country version. This HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Controls, Inc.
tems.
Controls on the interior rearview mirror

Universal Garage Door


Opener
The concept
The Universal Garage Door Opener can be used
to operate up to 3 functions in remote-control‐
led systems, such as garage door drives or light‐
ing systems. The Universal Garage Door Opener
replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmit‐
1 LED
ters. To operate it, the buttons on the interior
rearview mirror must be programmed for the de‐ 2 Buttons
sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for 3 Hand-held transmitter, required for pro‐
the system is needed for the programming pro‐ gramming.
cedure.
During programming Programming
During programming and before activat‐
ing a device using the Universal Garage Door General information
Opener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐ 1. Switch on the ignition.
mals, or objects in the range of movement of the 2. Initial setup:
remote-controlled device; otherwise, there is a
Press the right and left buttons on the inte‐
risk of injury or damage.
rior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- prox. 20 seconds until the LED on the inte‐
held transmitter.◀ rior rearview mirror begins to flash. All
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored programmed settings of the buttons on the
functions for security reasons. interior rearview mirror are deleted.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the sys‐
Compatibility tem to be operated a distance of approx. 1
If this symbol is printed on the packaging to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons on
or in the operating instructions of the the interior rearview mirror. The required

135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Interior equipment

distance depends on the particular hand- Synchronization:


held transmitter.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
4. Press the button of the desired function on controlled system.
the hand-held transmitter and the button
2. Program the corresponding button on the
being programmed on the interior rearview
interior rearview mirror as described.
mirror simultaneously and hold. The LED on
the interior rearview mirror flashes slowly at 3. Identify and press the synchronization but‐
first. ton on the system being set up. You have
approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
5. When the LED flashes more rapidly, release
both buttons. Rapid flashing indicates that 4. Press and hold the button on the interior
the button on the interior rearview mirror has rearview mirror for approx. 3 seconds and
been programmed. then release it. Repeat this step up to three
times if necessary to complete the synchro‐
If the LED does not flash faster after 60 sec‐
nization procedure. When synchronization
onds, change the distance between the in‐
is completed, the programmed function is
terior rearview mirror and the hand-held
executed.
transmitter and repeat the step. Multiple tri‐
als at different distances may be necessary.
Wait at least 15 seconds between trials.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1. Switch on the ignition.
6. To program additional functions on other
buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a distance
of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from the
The systems can be operated with the buttons
memory buttons.
on the interior rearview mirror.
The required distance depends on the par‐
Special characteristics of alternating- ticular hand-held transmitter.
code radio systems 3. Press the memory button of the Universal
If the system cannot be operated after repeated Garage Door Opener.
programming, check whether the system to be 4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx.
operated uses an alternating-code system. 20 seconds, press the transmit button on
Read the operating instructions of the system or the hand-held transmitter.
press and hold the programmed button on the 5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes
interior rearview mirror. If the LED on the interior rapidly.
rearview mirror flashes rapidly at first and then If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx.
lights up continuously for 2 seconds, the system 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat
is equipped with an alternating-code system. the step.
This flashing LED pattern repeats itself for ap‐
prox. 20 seconds. Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly af‐
ter approx. 60 seconds, change the distance
In systems with an alternating-code system, the and repeat the step. If programming was
Universal Garage Door Opener and the system aborted by the hand-held transmitter, hold
must be additionally synchronized. down the memory button and press and re‐
Please obtain additional information on syn‐ lease the button on the hand-held transmit‐
chronization in the operating instructions of the ter several times for 2 seconds.
system being set up.
The systems will be easier to synchronize with
the aid of a second person.

136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Interior equipment Controls

Controls The display shows you the main or secondary


compass direction in which you are driving.
Prior to operation
Before operating a unit with the Universal Operating concept
Garage Door Opener, ensure that there are no
Various functions can be called up by pressing
people, animals, or objects in the range of move‐
the adjustment button with a pointed object
ment of the system; otherwise, there is a risk of
such as a pen. The following adjustment options
injury or damage.
are displayed one after the other, depending on
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- how long the adjustment button is pressed:
held transmitter.◀
▷ Press briefly: switch the display on/off.
The system, such as the garage door, can be ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone.
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass.
view mirror with the engine running or the igni‐
tion switched on. When you are within the re‐ ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right hand
ception range of the system, press and hold the steering.
button until the function is initiated. The LED on ▷ 12 to 15 seconds: set the language.
the interior rearview mirror lights up continu‐
ously while the radio signal is being transmitted. Setting compass zones
Set the compass zone corresponding to the ve‐
Deleting stored functions hicle's geographic location so that the compass
Press the right and left buttons on the interior can function correctly; refer to the world map
rearview mirror simultaneously for approx. with compass zones.
20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All
stored functions are deleted. The functions can‐
not be deleted individually.

Digital compass

1 Adjustment button
2 Display

137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Interior equipment

Press the adjustment button for 3‑4 seconds. 2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
The number of the compass zone set is shown 3. Press the adjustment button for 6‑7 sec‐
in the display. onds to call up C. Then drive at least one full
To change the zone setting, briefly press the circle at a maximum speed of 4 mph/7 km/h.
adjustment button repeatedly until the display When the system is calibrated, the C is re‐
shows the number of the compass zone corre‐ placed by the compass directions.
sponding to the current location.
The compass is operational again after approx. Right-hand/left-hand steering
10 seconds. The digital compass is set for right-hand or left-
hand steering at the factory.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the Setting the language
following situations: Press the adjustment button for 12‑13 seconds.
▷ An incorrect compass direction is shown. Briefly press the adjustment button again to
switch between English "E" and German "O".
▷ The cardinal direction displayed does not
change even if the direction of travel The setting is automatically saved after approx.
changes. 10 seconds.
▷ Not all compass directions are shown.

Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metal ob‐
jects or overhead power lines in the vicinity
of the vehicle and that there is enough space
to drive in a circle.

138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Interior equipment Controls

Ashtray/cigarette lighter Lighter

Opening

Front

With the engine running or the ignition switched


on, press in the cigarette lighter.

The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops


back out.
To open the cover, slide it forward.
Danger of burns
Rear Only hold the hot lighter by its head; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
BMW X6 Switch off the ignition and take the remote con‐
trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that
children cannot use the lighter and burn them‐
selves.◀

Connecting electrical devices


Note
Do not connect the charger to the socket
Slide the cover back. Do not connect the battery charger to the
socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as
Emptying this could damage the vehicle.◀
Take out the insert.
Sockets
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is running
or when the ignition is switched on. The total
load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watt at
12 volt.
Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to
insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.

139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Interior equipment

Front center console In cargo area

Slide the cover forward. To access the socket: fold open the cover.

To access the socket: remove the cap or pull out


the cigarette lighter. BMW X6: in the rear console

Rear center console

Slide the cover back.

To access the socket: pull off the cover.


The arrangement of the sockets may vary with
the equipment.

To access the sockets: remove the caps. Cargo area


In storage compartment under center BMW X5: luggage compartment roller
armrest cover

To access the socket: remove the cover. Pull out the luggage compartment roller cover
and hook it into the brackets.

140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Interior equipment Controls

Do not deposit heavy objects 3. Push the case forward at the ends until it
Do not deposit heavy or hard objects on engages in the two side brackets.
the luggage compartment roller cover. Other‐ 4. Check whether the case is properly locked
wise, they may present a danger to occupants, in place by pulling it with a sudden move‐
for instance during braking and evasive maneu‐ ment.
vers.◀
BMW X6: cargo cover
Do not let the luggage area retractable
cover snap back
Do not let the luggage compartment retractable
cover snap back as this could damage the
cover.◀

Removing
1. Unlock the case with the button, arrow 1.

Deploy cargo cover by pulling back.

Do not deposit heavy objects


Do not deposit heavy or hard objects on
the cargo cover. Otherwise, they may present a
danger to occupants, for instance during braking
and evasive maneuvers.◀

2. Swing the case somewhat to the left, ar‐ Removing


row 2, and remove it.

Installing
When installing, proceed in the opposite order
of removal.

1. Grasp retracted cargo cover underneath the


upper fold on both sides.
2. Pull the cover back out of the side brackets.
3. Depending on your vehicle's equipment
package, you can store the cover under the
1. Lay the case on the left-hand side and push floor panel in the cargo area.
it forward, arrow 1.
2. Swing the case toward the inside, see ar‐
row 2.

141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Interior equipment

Locking the backrest


Before letting passengers ride in the rear,
engage the seat backrests, locking them in
place. Otherwise, there is the danger of an ac‐
cident due to unexpected seat movement.◀

Ensure that the lock is securely engaged


When folding back the backrest, be sure
that it locks in place securely. The red warning
field in the control display disappears. If it is not
Installing properly engaged, transported cargo could en‐
When installing, proceed in the opposite order ter the passenger compartment during braking
of removal. or evasive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle
occupants.◀
1. Set the cargo cover into place on the left and
right sides. Observe the instructions concerning the
2. Lift the back of the cover slightly and slide safety belt
forward until it snaps into the two side brack‐ Observe the instructions concerning the safety
ets. belt, refer to page 53. Otherwise, personal pro‐
tection may be compromised.◀
Enlarging the cargo area
The rear seat backrest is divided. You can fold
down both sides separately in order to expand
the cargo area.
BMW X6: before folding the rear seat
backrest forward
Before folding the rear seat backrest forward or
using the ski bag, remove beverage containers
from the cupholder and close the cupholder.◀

Reach into the recess and pull toward the front.

142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Storage compartments Controls

Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment Glove compartment
This chapter describes all series equipment as
Opening
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.

Notes
Press the button. The covers open upward and
No loose objects in the passenger com‐
downward and the lighting in the glove com‐
partment
partment switches on.
Do not stow any objects in the passenger com‐
partment without securing them; otherwise, Close the glove compartment again im‐
they may present a danger to occupants for in‐ mediately
stance during braking and avoidance maneu‐
Close the glove compartment immediately after
vers.◀
use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur
No non-slip mats on the dashboard during accidents.◀
Do not use non-slip materials, such as
non-slip mats, on the dashboard, or it could be Closing
damaged by the substances in the materials.◀ Push the lower cover closed.

USB interface for data transfer

Port for importing and exporting data, such as


music collections, refer to page 201, on USB
devices.

Observe the following when connecting:

143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Storage compartments

▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ Rear center armrest
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or BMW X6 and BMW X5 with 3rd row
lamps to the USB interface. seats
▷ Do not connect a USB hard drive.
▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.

Center armrest front


Storage compartment
A storage compartment is located under the
armrest between the front seats and, depending Pull on the loop and fold down the center arm‐
on the vehicle's equipment, also a cover for the rest.
mobile phone cradle or the snap-in adapter.
Details on this mobile phone cradle, refer to BMW X5 without 3rd row seats
page 240.

Opening

Unlock the center armrest with the button in the


lower section of the opening and fold down.

Push cover down slightly and press the button.


The cover folds upward.
Storage compartments
Connection for an external audio Compartments are located in the doors, in the
device center console in the front and rear as well as in
the rear console in the BMW X6.
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over Storage nets are located on the backrests of the
the car's loudspeaker system: front seats.

▷ AUX-IN port, refer to page 206. Items in the storage nets


▷ USB audio interface, refer to page 207. Do not stow hard or sharp-edged objects
in the storage nets; otherwise there is an in‐
creased risk of injury in the event of an acci‐
dent.◀

144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Storage compartments Controls

Clothes hooks Front

BMW X5
The clothes hooks are located at the grab han‐
dles in the rear.

BMW X6

Slide the cover back.

Rear

BMW X5

To fold out, press against upper edge.

Do not obstruct view


When suspending clothing from the
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision.◀

No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks;
Unlock the center armrest with the button in the
otherwise, they may present a danger to pas‐
lower section of the opening and fold down.
sengers during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers.◀

Cupholders
Notes
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the Press the button; the cover folds forward.
increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
With 3rd row seats:
Unsuitable containers
Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain‐
ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam‐
age.◀

145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Storage compartments

▷ Storage well under the cargo floor cover.


▷ Retaining straps on the left and right side
trim for fastening small objects.
▷ Lashing rail with lashing eyes. You can se‐
cure heavy-duty cargo straps on the lashing
eyes. They can be removed at the notches
in the rails. To move the lashing eyes, press
the button.
Read and comply with the information enclosed
Fold down the center armrest. Press the button;
with the heavy-duty cargo straps.
the cupholders are opened.

The cupholders of the 3rd row seats are located Floor panel flap
in the center console between the seats.

BMW X6

To access the onboard vehicle tool kit etc.

To open, swing up the flap by the handle, refer


to arrow.
Slide the cover forward.
The cargo floor cover is lockable.
Folding down the rear seat backrest and
using the ski bag Adaptive fixing system
Remove the beverage container before folding The adaptive fixing system is used to divide up
the rear seat backrest forward or using the ski the cargo area. It consists of two brackets with
bag; otherwise it may cause damage.◀ a telescopic rail and retaining straps. These are
guided into the two rails on the cargo area floor.
Securing cargo
Storage compartments in the Before using the adaptive fixing system,
cargo area fold up and lock the rear seat backrest; other‐
wise, the cargo could be thrown into the vehicle
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol‐
interior in an accident.◀
lowing storage compartments can be found in
the cargo area:
▷ Storage compartments behind the remova‐
ble side panels on the right and left in the
cargo area and under the cargo floor cover,
storage compartment on the right in the
cargo area.

146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Storage compartments Controls

Positioning cargo between telescopic rail and


retaining strap:

1. Lay the cargo on the telescopic rail. Press


the button, arrow 1, and route the retaining
strap around the cargo, arrow 2.
2. Hook the retaining strap into the mount 3 on
the telescopic rail.
3. Press the button of the bracket, arrow 1. The
1 Brackets retaining strap is tensioned.
2 Telescopic rail It is also possible to hook the two retaining
straps onto each other.
3 Notch in the cargo area rail
When the adaptive fixing system is no longer
needed, unhook the retaining strap and guide it
Mounting brackets back into the bracket holding the hook to pre‐
The two brackets are connected with a tele‐ vent damage and injury.
scopic rail. Then slide the fastening system toward the front
1. Insert the brackets at the respective notch in order to permit the best possible use of the
in the rail on the cargo area floor. cargo area.
2. Press down the brackets to push them into
Removing brackets
the desired position.
Press down the brackets, slide them up to the
3. Check the firm seating of the brackets. They
notches of the rails and remove them.
must be clearly heard to engage.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
No cargo on brackets adaptive fixing system can be stored under the
Do not lay cargo on the brackets, as oth‐ cargo floor panel in the cargo area.
erwise they could be unlocked.◀

Dividing up cargo area Ski bag


The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport
of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snow‐
boards.
Skis with a length of up to 6 ft/2.10 m can be
stowed using the ski bag. When stowing skis
with a length of 6 ft/2.10 m, the capacity of the
ski bag is reduced as the bag narrows.
Folding in display screen
Before loading the ski bag, fold in the dis‐
The cargo can be positioned as follows:
play screen of the DVD systems in the rear; oth‐
▷ Between the rear seat backrest and the tele‐ erwise, the display screen could be damaged.◀
scopic rail
▷ Between the telescopic rail and the retaining
strap

147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Controls Storage compartments

Loading Securing cargo


1. Fold down the center armrest, press the but‐
ton and open the cover.

After loading, secure the ski bag and its con‐


tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten‐
2. Press the button again; the cover in the sioning buckle for this purpose.
cargo area opens. If you press the button
firmly the first time, this cover also opens. Securing the ski bag

3. Extend the ski bag between the front seats Secure the ski bag in this way. Failure to
and fill it. do so may cause it to endanger occupants dur‐
ing braking or evasive maneuvers.◀
4. Attach the retaining strap:
BMW X5: insert the latch plate of the ski bag re‐ To store the ski bag, perform the above steps in
taining strap into the center safety belt buckle reverse order.
that is marked CENTER.
Removing ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g., for
faster drying or to allow it to be put to other uses.

BMW X6: attach the hook of the ski bag retaining


strap to the eyelet on the backrest.

1. Pull the handle forward, arrow 1.


2. Take out the ski bag upward, arrow 2.
3. Close the cover in the cargo area.
More information on the various inserts available
can be obtained from the service center.

Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp


edges to prevent damage.

148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Storage compartments Controls

149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving tips
This section provides you with information useful
in dealing with specific driving and operating
conditions.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500


Driving tips Things to remember when driving

Things to remember when driving


Vehicle equipment tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe‐
riod.
This chapter describes all series equipment as
Drive conservatively for the first
well as country-specific and special equipment
200 miles/300 km.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
Brake system
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
tems. contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Breaking-in period
Following part replacement
General information The same breaking in procedures should be ob‐
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to served if any of the components mentioned
each other. above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
The following instructions will help achieve a
long vehicle life and good economy.

Engine and differential


General driving notes
Always obey all official speed limits. Closing tailgate

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Drive with the tailgate closed

Do not exceed the maximum engine and road Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
speeds: wise, passengers and other road users may be
endangered or the vehicle may be damaged if an
▷ For a gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and
accident occurs or during braking or evasive
100 mph/160 km/h.
maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐
▷ For a diesel engine, 3,500 rpm and ter the passenger compartment.◀
93 mph/150 km/h.
If the vehicle must be driven with the tailgate
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
open:
transmission's kickdown mode for the initial
miles. 1. Drive moderately.
2. Close all windows and the glass sunroof/
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km panoramic glass sunroof.
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be 3. Greatly increase the blower speed.
increased.

Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐

152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Things to remember when driving Driving tips

Hot exhaust system Hydroplaning


Hot exhaust system On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
High temperatures are generated in the
exhaust system. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
loss of contact between the tires and the road
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, grass,
steer and brake the vehicle.
etc. do not come in contact with the hot exhaust
system during driving, while in idle position Hydroplaning
mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐
to a fire, and with it the risk of serious personal duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
injury as well as property damage.
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tire
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there
tread depth decreases. Minimum tread depth,
is the danger of getting burned.◀
refer to page 278.

Diesel particulate filter Driving through water


Soot particles are collected in the diesel partic‐ Maximum water depth:
ulate filter and periodically burned away at high
▷ BMW X5: 20 inches/50 cm.
temperatures.
▷ BMW X6: 17 inches/45 cm.
During the cleaning period of several minutes:
▷ The engine may temporarily run less Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
smoothly. tions

▷ A somewhat higher engine speed may be Only drive through water up to the above-men‐
necessary to achieve the accustomed per‐ tioned depth at no greater than walking speed;
formance. otherwise, the engine, electrical system, and
transmission can be damaged.◀
▷ Noises and a slight amount of smoke may
emerge from the exhaust, even for a short
period after the engine is switched off. Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
Mobile communication devices in the feature.
vehicle Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐ way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
hicle sary.
It is not recommended to use mobile phones, The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.
such as mobile phones without a direct connec‐ You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum
tion to an external aerial in the vehicle's passen‐ of steering effort.
ger compartment. Otherwise, the vehicle elec‐ Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
tronics and mobile communication devices can the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
interfere with each other. In addition, there is no active mode.
assurance that the radiation generated during
Do not let your foot rest on the brake pedal
transmission will be discharged from the vehicle
interior.◀ Do not drive with your foot resting on the
brake pedal. Even light but consistent pedal

153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving tips Things to remember when driving

pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake Do not drive in neutral


wear and possibly even brake failure.◀ Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In
Objects in the area around the pedals addition, steering and brake assist is unavailable
with the engine stopped.◀
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
Brake disc corrosion
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
impeded while driving on the brake pads are furthered by:
Do not place additional floor mats over existing ▷ Low mileage.
mats or other objects. ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
Only use floor mats that have been approved for used at all.
the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
again when they are returned after being re‐ that must be exerted by the pads during brake
moved, such as for cleaning.◀ applications to clean the discs is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
Driving in wet conditions brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly fect that generally cannot be corrected.
exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every
few miles. Condensation under the parked vehicle
Ensure that this action does not endanger other When using the automatic climate control, con‐
road users. densation water develops that exits underneath
the vehicle.
The heat generated in this process helps dry the
brake discs and pads. Therefore, traces of condensed water under the
vehicle are normal.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.

Hills Loading
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear Overloading the vehicle
in which the least braking is required. Otherwise, To avoid exceeding the approved carrying
the brake system may overheat, resulting in a capacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle.
reduction in the brake system efficiency. Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐
You can increase the engine's braking effect by creases the rate at which damage develops in‐
shifting down in the manual mode of the auto‐ side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss
matic transmission, refer to page 74. of tire inflation pressure.◀
Avoid load on the brakes No fluids in the cargo area
Avoid placing excessive load on the brake Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
system. Light but consistent brake pressure can cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐
lead to high temperatures, brake wear and pos‐ aged.◀
sibly even brake failure.◀

154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Things to remember when driving Driving tips

Determining the load limit Load


BMW X5:

1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐


hicle’s placard: BMW X6:
▷ The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐
hicle and unstable driving situations may
result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
pounds. the occupants and the cargo.
4. The resulting figure equals the available The greater the weight of the occupants, the
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. less cargo that can be transported.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail‐
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs: 1,400 lbs minus 750 lbs = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transfered to your
vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting
a trailer to determine how this may reduce
the available cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity of your vehicle.

155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving tips Things to remember when driving

Stowing cargo ▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
BMW X5 belts in the BMW X5 in the opposite buckle.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low
as possible, ideally directly behind the
backrests.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners.
▷ Do not pile objects higher than the top edge
of the backrest.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to
stow cargo.
▷ Place protective material around any sharp-
edged or pointed objects that could bump
against the rear window while the vehicle is
in motion.

Securing cargo

BMW X5

BMW X6

BMW X6

▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐


taining straps, a cargo net or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo
straps.

156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Things to remember when driving Driving tips

Four lashing eyes mounted in the cargo area Loading


are used to secure these cargo straps, refer Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
to illustrations. gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
Adhere to the information included with the vehicle handling and steering response.
cargo straps. Therefore, note the following when loading and
Securing cargo driving:
Stow and secure the cargo as described ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads
above; otherwise it may present a danger to the and the approved gross vehicle weight.
occupants, for instance during braking and ▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
avoidance maneuvers. ▷ The roof load should not be too large in area.
Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the ▷ Always load the heaviest pieces on the bot‐
passenger compartment without securing tom.
them; otherwise, they may present a danger to
occupants, for instance during braking and ▷ Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and
avoidance maneuvers. securely.

Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
weight or either of the approved axle loads, as path of the tailgate.
excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and ▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration
may also place you in violation of traffic safety and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐
laws. tly.
Use only the lashing eyes pictured to fasten the
heavy-duty cargo straps. Do not secure cargo
using the upper top tether, refer to page 62, Driving on poor roads
mounting points; otherwise, these may become Your vehicle combines an all-wheel drive sys‐
damaged.◀ tem with the advantages of a normal passenger
car.
Do not drive on unpaved terrain
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as other‐
wise the vehicle may be damaged.◀
Special rack system as optional
accessory For your own safety and the safety of passen‐
A special rack system is available as an optional gers and the vehicle, adhere to the following
accessory. points:
Follow the directions given in the installation in‐ ▷ Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before
structions. driving; never take risks.
▷ Adjust speeds according to road conditions.
Mounting The steeper and rougher the road surface is,
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained the lower the speed should be.
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof/panor‐ ▷ When driving on steep uphill and downhill
amic glass sunroof. grades: the engine oil and coolant should be
filled nearly to the MAX mark.
BMW X5: the vehicle can be driven on uphill
and downhill grades up to 50 %.

157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Driving tips Things to remember when driving

▷ Use Hill Descent Control HDC, refer to Saving fuel


page 106, on steep downhill grades.
BMW X5: the vehicle can be driven away on General information
uphill grades of up to 33 %. The permissible Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
body roll is 50 %. the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
▷ Watch for stones, holes, and other obstacles sions.
and drive around these where possible. Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
▷ On bumps and rough roads, avoid contact ferent factors.
between the vehicle body and the ground. The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
The maximum ground clearance is 8 in‐ ing style and regular maintenance, refer to
ches/20 cm and may vary with the loaded page 286, can have an influence on fuel con‐
cargo. sumption and on the environmental impact.
▷ When driving through water, do not exceed
the maximum water height. Remove unnecessary cargo
▷ BMW X5: 20 inches/50 cm Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
▷ BMW X6: 17 inches/45 cm
Remove attached parts following use
Drive at walking speed only and do not stop
the vehicle. Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear
luggage racks after use.
▷ After driving through water, press on the
brake pedal several times at low speeds to Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dry the brakes. dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

▷ Depending on the prevailing terrain, activate


Closing the windows and glass
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
sunroof/panoramic glass sunroof
page 104, briefly.
Driving with the glass sunroof/panoramic glass
▷ When the wheels spin, accelerate to enable
sunroof and windows open results in increased
the driving stability control systems to dis‐
air resistance and raises fuel consumption.
tribute the drive force to the individual
wheels.
Check the tire inflation pressure
▷ The stone chip guard reduces the risk of regularly
damage to painted vehicle components,
Check and, if necessary, correct the tire inflation
such as in the area of the side skirts and
pressure, refer to page 269, at least twice a
wheel arches. Your service center will be
month and before starting on a long trip.
glad to advise you.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
After driving on poor roads sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Adhere to the following points to ensure vehicle
safety:
Drive away without delay
▷ Remove excessive accumulations of dirt
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
and mud from the vehicle body.
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
▷ Clear mud, snow, ice, etc., from the wheels away, but at moderate engine speeds.
and tires and check for damage.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.

158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Things to remember when driving Driving tips

Look well ahead when driving


Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.

Avoid high engine speeds


Driving at a low engine speed reduces fuel con‐
sumption and minimizes wear.

Use coasting conditions


When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the ac‐
celerator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Switch off the engine during longer


stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Fuel savings are already achieved after the en‐
gine is turned off for as little as 4 seconds.

Switch off any functions that are not


currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐
dow defroster require a lot of energy and con‐
sume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they are
not actually needed.

Have maintenance carried out


Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
Have the maintenance carried out by your serv‐
ice center.
Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 286.

159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Navigation
This chapter contains various examples of how
the navigation system can guide you reliably to
your destination.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500


Navigation Navigation system

Navigation system
Vehicle equipment 2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version"
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment Information is displayed on the data version.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in Updating the navigation data
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This General information
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can
tems. be updated.
Current navigation data and the authorization
code are available from your service center.
General information ▷ Depending on the data volume, a data up‐
The navigation system can determine the pre‐ date may take several hours.
cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat‐ ▷ Update during the trip to preserve battery.
ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably
▷ During the update, only the basic functions
guide you to every entered destination.
of the navigation system are available.
Entries in stationary vehicle ▷ The status of the update can be viewed.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐ ▷ After the updating process is complete, the
tionary, and always give priority to the applicable system restarts.
traffic regulations in the event of any contradic‐
▷ Remove the medium with the navigation
tion between traffic and road conditions and the
data after the update.
instructions issued by the navigation system.
Failure to take to this precaution can place you
in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants
Performing an update
and other road users in danger.◀ 1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
player with the labeled side facing up.
Opening the navigation system 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
1. Press the button on the controller. 3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga‐
2. "Navigation" tion DVD.
4. Change the DVD if necessary.
The navigation system can also be called
up directly using the button on the con‐ After the trip is interrupted, follow the instruc‐
troller. tions on the Control Display.

Viewing the status


1. Open "Options".
Navigation data
2. "Navigation update"
Information on navigation data
1. "Navigation"

162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Navigation system Navigation

Removing navigation DVD

1. Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

2. Remove the DVD.

163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Navigation Destination entry

Destination entry
Vehicle equipment Manual destination entry
This chapter describes all series equipment as
General information
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also The system supports you in entering street
describes equipment that may not be found in names and house numbers by automatically
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected completing the entry and providing entry com‐
special equipment or the country version. This parisons, refer to page 24.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Stored town/city and street names can be called
tems. up quickly.
▷ If the existing entries should not be changed,
the entries for the state/province and town/
At a glance city can be skipped.
In entering your destination you can select from ▷ Destination guidance is started to the town/
the following options: city center if no street is entered.
▷ Enter the destination manually, see below.
Entering a state/province
▷ Select the destination from the address
book, refer to page 166. 1. Press the button.
▷ Last destinations, refer to page 167. 2. "Navigation"
▷ Special destinations, refer to page 167. 3. "Enter address"
▷ Destination entry via map, refer to
page 169.
▷ Using the home address as the destination,
refer to page 167.
▷ Destination entry by voice, refer to
page 170.
▷ Enter the destination via BMW Assist, refer
to page 169.
Entries in stationary vehicle
4. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐
state/province.
tionary, and always give priority to the applicable
traffic regulations in the event of any contradic‐
tion between traffic and road conditions and the
instructions issued by the navigation system.
Failure to take to this precaution can place you
in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants
and other road users in danger.◀

164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Destination entry Navigation

Entering a town/city 2. Highlight the street.


1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐ 3. Select the street.
played town/city.
Alternative: enter the street address
and house number
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter the street as you would the town/city.
3. "House number"
4. Select the numbers.
5. Change to the list of house numbers.
6. Select a house number or range of house
2. Select letters, if necessary. numbers.
The list is narrowed down further with each
Street does not exist in the destination
entry.
city/town
3. Move the controller to the right.
The desired street does not exist in the specified
4. Select the name of the town/city from the city/town because it belongs to another part of
list. the city/town.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
1. "Navigation"
name:
2. "Enter address"
1. Change to the list of town/city names.
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Highlight the town/city.
4. Change to the list of street names.
3. Select the town/city.
5. Select "In" with the state/province currently
displayed.
Entering the postal code
All streets of the selected state/province are
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
offered. The associated town/city is dis‐
played town/city.
played after the street name.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Select the numbers.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/
cities.
5. Highlight the entry.
6. Selecting an entry.

Entering a street and intersection


1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
6. Select the letters.
2. Enter a street and intersection in the same
way as you would enter a town/city. 7. Change to the list of street names.
If there are several streets with the same name: 8. Highlight the street.
9. Select the street.
1. Change to the list of street names.

165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Navigation Destination entry

Starting destination guidance after 3. "Guidance"


entering the destination 4. Open "Options".
1. "Accept destination" 5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another contact"
destination"
Add, refer to page 171, a destination as a
further destination.

Address book
Create contacts, refer to page 251.

Selecting a destination from the


address book 6. Select an existing contact, if available.
1. "Navigation" 7. "Business address" or "Home address"
2. "Address book" 8. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
name".
Contacts with addresses are displayed if
these have been checked as destinations. 9. "Store in vehicle"
If the contacts with addresses from the mo‐
bile phone are not displayed, they first need Storing the position
to be checked as destinations, refer to The current position can be stored in the ad‐
page 252. dress book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact"

3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with


"A-Z search".
4. "Business address" or "Home address"

Storing the destination in the address


book 4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex‐
isting contact from the list. Select the type
After entering the destination, store the desti‐
of address and enter the first and last name.
nation in the address book.
5. "Store in vehicle"
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"

166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Destination entry Navigation

Editing or deleting an address 2. "Last destinations"


1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"

Using the home address as the


destination
The home address must be stored. Specify the
home address, refer to page 244. Starting destination guidance
1. "Navigation" 1. "Navigation"

2. "Address book" 2. "Last destinations"

3. "Home" 3. Select the destination.


4. "Start guidance"

Editing the destination


1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
4. "Start guidance"
Deleting the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
Last destinations 2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
At a glance 4. Open "Options".
The destinations previously entered are stored
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last
automatically.
destinations"
These destinations can be called up and used
as a destination for destination guidance.
Special destinations
Calling up the last destination
1. "Navigation" General information
Even with the latest navigation data, information
on specific special destinations may have
changed; for example, gas stations might not be
in operation.

167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Navigation Destination entry

Opening the search for special "Start search": if a search term is not entered,
destinations the search is repeated with the previous search
Selection of special destinations, such as hotels term.
or tourist attractions.
Category search
1. "Navigation"
1. "Category search"
2. "Points of Interest"
2. "Town/City"
3. Select the search function.
3. Select or enter the town/city.

Online Search 4. "Category"

1. "Google™ Local Search" 5. Select the category.

2. Select a special destination. 6. "Category details"

3. Select the symbol. For some special destinations, multiple cat‐


egory details can be selected. Move the
4. "Start guidance"
controller to the left to leave the category
details.
A-Z search
7. "Start search"
1. "A-Z search"
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
2. "Town/City"
8. Select a special destination.
3. Select or enter the town/city.
Details are displayed.
4. "Category"
If multiple details are stored, you can leaf
5. Select the category.
through the pages.
6. "Category details"
If a phone number is available, a connection
For some special destinations, multiple cat‐ can be established if necessary.
egory details can be selected. Move the
9. Select the symbol.
controller to the left to leave the category
details. 10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
7. "Keyword"
Add a destination as a further destination,
8. Enter the keyword.
refer to page 171.
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
9. Select a special destination. Display of special destinations
Details are displayed. List of special destinations: special destinations
If multiple details are stored, you can leaf are arranged by distance and appear with a di‐
through the pages. rectional arrow pointing to the special destina‐
tion.
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established if necessary. In the splitscreen, special destinations of the se‐
lected category are displayed in the map view as
10. Select the symbol. symbols. The display depends on the scale of
11. "Start guidance" or "Add as another the map and the category.
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 171.

168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Destination entry Navigation

Destination entry via BMW Assist ▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the
A connection is established to the Concierge controller in the required direction and
service, refer to page 254. turn it.

1. "Navigation" Specifying the street


2. "Enter address" If the system does not recognize the street, one
3. Open "Options". of the following pieces of information is dis‐
4. "BMW Assist dest. entry" played:
▷ A street name in the vicinity.
Displaying special destinations in the ▷ The county.
map ▷ The coordinates of the destination.
To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map view: Additional functions
1. "Navigation" Additional functions are available on the inter‐
2. "Map" active map after the controller is pressed.

3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the setting.

Destination entry by map


Selecting the destination
1. "Navigation" ▷ Select the symbol.
2. "Map" "Start guidance" or "Add as another
The current position of the vehicle is dis‐ destination"
played on the map. Add a destination as a further destination,
3. "Interactive map" refer to page 171.
▷ "Exit interactive map": return to the map
view.
▷ "View in northern direction" or "View in
driving direction"
▷ "Display destination": the map section
around the destination is displayed.
▷ "Display current location": the map section
around your current location is displayed.
▷ "Find points of interest": the search for spe‐
4. Select the destination with crosshairs.
cial destinations is started.
▷ To change the scale: turn the controller.
▷ To shift the map: move the controller in
the required direction.

169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Navigation Destination entry

Destination entry by voice With the destination entry menu displayed:

General information 1. Press the button on the steering


▷ Instructions for voice activation system, re‐ wheel.
fer to page 25. 2. ›City‹ or ›Spell city‹
▷ When making a destination entry by voice, 3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
you can change between voice operation town/city.
and iDrive. 4. Say the name of the town/city, or name at
▷ To have the available spoken instructions least the first three letters.
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹. Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit‐
ies may be suggested.
Saying the entries
5. Select a location:
▷ The town/city, street, and house number
can be entered using a single command. ▷ Select a recommended town/city: ›Yes‹.

▷ Spell the entry if the spoken language and ▷ Select a different town/city: ›New entry‹.
the language of the system differ. ▷ Select an entry: ›Entry ...‹, for instance,
▷ Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag‐ entry 2.
gerating the pronunciation and inserting ▷ Spell an entry: ›Spell city‹.
lengthy pauses between the letters. 6. Continue making the entry as prompted by
▷ The methods of entry depend on the navi‐ the system.
gation data in use and the country and lan‐ If there are several towns/cities with the same
guage settings. name:
Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in a
Entering the address in a command list and displayed as one location followed by an
ellipsis.
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel. 1. Select an entry: ›Yes‹ or ›Entry ...‹, e. g., En‐
2. ›Enter address‹ try 2.

3. Wait for a request from the system. 2. Select the desired town/city.

4. Say the address in the suggested order.


Entering a street or intersection
5. Continue making the entry as prompted by separately
the system.
Enter a street and intersection in the same way
If necessary, individually name the separate as you would enter a town/city.
components of the address, e.g., the town/
city. Entering a house number separately
Depending on the data in the navigation system,
Entering a town/city separately house numbers up to number 2,000 can be en‐
The town/city can be said as a complete word. tered.

1. ›House number‹
2. Say the house number.
Say each digit separately.

170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Destination entry Navigation

3. Continue making the entry as prompted by 5. Turn the controller until the intermediate
the system. destination is located at the desired location
in the list.
Starting destination guidance 6. Press the controller.
›Start guidance‹
Starting the trip
1. After all intermediate destinations are en‐
Planning a trip with tered, highlight the first destination.
intermediate destinations If the second destination, for example, is
highlighted when destination guidance is
New trip started, the first destination is skipped.
A trip can be planned with several intermediate 2. "Start guidance"
destinations.
This symbol marks the active leg of the
1. "Navigation" trip.
2. "Map"
Storing a trip
3. Move the controller to the left if necessary.
Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. If
4. "Guidance" necessary, delete existing trips to be able to
5. "Enter new destination" store new trips.
6. Select the type of destination entry. 1. Open "Options".
2. "Store trip"
3. Enter a name for the trip.
4. "OK"

Selecting a stored trip


1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select a stored trip.
7. Enter the intermediate destination.
4. "Start guidance"
8. "Start guidance"
Changing the trip direction
Entering intermediate destinations Intermediate destinations are displayed in re‐
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can verse order in the list.
be entered for a trip.
1. "Map"
1. "Enter new destination"
2. "Guidance"
2. Select the type of destination entry.
3. Open "Options".
3. Enter the intermediate destination.
4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
4. "Add as another destination"
The intermediate destination is entered in
the destination list and is highlighted.

171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Navigation Destination entry

Intermediate destination options


1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip destinations"
4. Select an intermediate destination.
▷ "Edit destination"
▷ "Reposition dest. in the trip": move an
intermediate destination to another po‐
sition in the list.
▷ "Delete dest. in the trip"
▷ "Go to next dest. in the trip"
Some options are not available for certain trips.

Deleting a stored trip


1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Highlight the desired trip.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip"

Opening the last trip


1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. "Last trip"
4. "Start guidance"

172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Destination guidance Navigation

Destination guidance
Vehicle equipment "Resume guidance"

This chapter describes all series equipment as


well as country-specific and special equipment
Route criteria
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
General information
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This ▷ The route calculated can be influenced by
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ selecting certain criteria.
tems. ▷ The route criteria can be changed when the
destination is entered and during destina‐
tion guidance.
Starting destination ▷ Road types are part of the navigation data
guidance and are taken into consideration when plan‐
ning a route, e.g., avoid highways.
1. "Navigation" ▷ The recommended route may differ from the
2. Make a destination entry, refer to page 164. route you would take based on personal ex‐
3. "Accept destination" perience.

4. "Start guidance" ▷ The settings are stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
The route is shown on the Control Display.
▷ Destination guidance with traffic bulletins,
The distance to the destination/intermediate
refer to page 179.
destination and the estimated time of arrival are
displayed in the map view.
Changing the route criteria
The arrow view is displayed in the Head-up Dis‐
1. "Navigation"
play and in some cases on the Control Display.
2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
Terminating destination 4. Select the criterion:
guidance ▷ "Fast route": time-optimized route,
being a combination of the shortest pos‐
1. "Navigation" sible route and the fastest roads.
2. "Map" ▷ "ECO PRO route": optimized com‐
3. "Guidance" bination of the fastest and shortest
4. "Stop guidance" route.
▷ "Short route": short distance, irre‐
spective of how fast or slow progress will
Continuing destination be.
guidance ▷ "Alternative routes": if available, alter‐
native routes are suggested during ac‐
If the destination was not reached during the last
tive destination guidance.
trip, destination guidance can be resumed.

173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Navigation Destination guidance

The individual suggestions are high‐ ▷ Traffic bulletins.


lighted in color. ▷ Distance to the next change in direction.
▷ Street name at the next change in direction.

Lane information
On multi-lane roads, the recommended lanes
are marked in the arrow view by a triangle.
▷ Solid triangle: best lane.
▷ Empty triangle: possible lane. However, an‐
other lane change may be needed shortly.
5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if
Displaying a list of route sections
necessary:
When destination guidance is active, a list of the
▷ "Avoid highways": highways are
route sections can be displayed. The driving dis‐
avoided wherever possible.
tance and traffic bulletins are displayed for each
▷ "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided route section.
wherever possible.
1. "Navigation"
▷ "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided
where possible. 2. "Route information"
3. Highlight a route section.
The route section is displayed on the split
Route screen.
Different views of the route are available during
destination guidance:
▷ Arrow view.
Bypassing a section of the
▷ List of route sections.
route
▷ Map view, refer to page 175. Calculate a new route for a route section.
▷ Arrow view in the Head-up Display, refer to 1. "Navigation"
page 125. 2. "Route information"
3. "New route for"
Arrow view
The following information is displayed during
destination guidance:
▷ Large arrow: indicates the current direction
of travel.
▷ Street name of the road currently being
driven on.
▷ Small arrow: indicates the next change in di‐
rection.
▷ Intersection view.
▷ Lane information.

174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Destination guidance Navigation

4. Turn the controller. Enter the number of kilo‐ Destination guidance


meters within which you would like to return
to the original route.
through voice instructions
5. Press the controller. Switching spoken instructions on/off
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
Resuming the original route rently in use.
If the route section should no longer be by‐
passed: 1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
1. "Navigation"
3. "Voice instructions"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:" Repeating a spoken instruction
4. "Remove blocking" 1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Highlight the symbol.
Gas station recommendation
4. Press the controller twice.
The remaining range is calculated and gas sta‐
tions along the route are displayed. Volume of spoken instructions
Even with the latest navigation data, information Turn the volume knob while giving an instruction
on individual special destinations may have until the desired volume is set.
changed; for example, gas stations might not be
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
in operation.
rently in use.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information" Saving the spoken instructions on the
programmable memory buttons
3. "Recommended refuel"
The function for switching the spoken instruc‐
A list of the gas stations is displayed.
tions on/off can be stored on a programmable
4. Highlight a gas station. memory button, refer to page 23, for quick ac‐
The position of the gas station is shown on cess.
the split screen.
5. Select the gas station.
6. Select the symbol.
Map view
7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to Selecting the map view
the selected gas station is started.
1. "Navigation"
"Add as another destination": the gas sta‐
2. "Map"
tion is added to the route.

175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Navigation Destination guidance

At a glance Status fields


Show/hide: press the controller.
▷ Upper status field: time, telephone, and en‐
tertainment details.
▷ Lower status field: symbol for active desti‐
nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins,
time of arrival, and distance to destination.

Function bar
The following functions are available in the func‐
1 Function bar tion bar:
2 Route section with traffic obstruction
Symbol Function
3 Traffic sign for traffic obstruction
Start/end destination guidance.
4 Planned route
5 Current location Switch spoken instructions on/
off.
6 Upper status field
7 Lower status field Change the route criteria.

Search for a special destination.


Lines in the map
Display traffic bulletins.
Streets and routes are displayed in different col‐
ors and styles depending on their classification. Open the interactive map.
Dashed lines represent railways and ferry con‐
Set the map view.
nections. Country borders are indicated by thin
lines. Change the scale.

Traffic obstructions
To change to the function bar, move the con‐
Small triangles along the planned route indicate troller to the left.
route sections with traffic obstructions, depend‐
ing on the map scale. The direction of the trian‐ Changing the map section
gles indicates the direction of the obstruction.
"Interactive map"
The traffic signs indicate the significance of the
▷ To shift the map: move the controller in the
obstruction.
required direction.
▷ Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the
▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the con‐
planned route or direction.
troller in the required direction and turn it.
▷ Grey traffic sign: the obstruction does not
affect the planned route or direction. Changing the scale
Traffic bulletins, refer to page 177. 1. Select the symbol.
2. To change the scale: turn the controller.
Planned route
After destination guidance is started, the plan‐
ned route is displayed on the map.

176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Destination guidance Navigation

Automatically scaled map scale 3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
In the map view facing north, turn the controller until the split screen is selected.
in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis‐ 4. Select "Split screen content" or the scale.
played. The entire route between the current lo‐ 5. Select the map view.
cation and the destination is displayed on the
▷ "Arrow display"
map.
▷ "Map facing north"
Settings for the map view ▷ "Map direction of travel"
The settings are stored for the remote control ▷ "Map view with perspective"
currently in use. ▷ "Position"
1. "Navigation" ▷ "Exit ramp view": selected blind drive‐
2. "Map" ways are displayed three dimensionally.
3. Open "Options". ▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map"
4. "Settings" 6. To change the scale: select the split screen
and turn the controller.
5. To set the map view:
▷ "Day/night mode"
Select and create the necessary settings Traffic bulletins
depending on the light conditions.
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the At a glance
setting is disregarded. ▷ Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta‐
▷ "Satellite images" tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa‐
tion of a traffic information service. Informa‐
Depending on availability and resolution,
tion on traffic obstructions and hazards is
satellite images are displayed at scales of
updated continuously.
approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to
1,000 km. Certain BMW models equipped with navi‐
gation have the capability to display real-
▷ "Perspective view in 3D"
time traffic information. If your system has
Prominent areas that are contained in the this capability the following additional terms
navigation data are displayed on the map in and conditions apply:
3D.
An End-User shall no longer have the right
▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map" to use the Traffic Data in the event that the
The map is optimized for displaying traffic End-User is in material breach of the terms
bulletins, refer to page 178. and conditions contained herein.
Symbols for the special destinations are no A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
longer displayed. Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (“Total Traffic
Network”) holds the rights to the traffic in‐
Map view for splitscreen cident data and RDS-TMC network through
The map view can be selected for the split which it is delivered. You may not modify,
screen independently from the main screen. copy, scan or use any other method to re‐
produce, duplicate, republish, transmit or
1. Open "Options". distribute in any way any portion of traffic in‐
2. "Split screen" cident data. You agree to indemnify, defend

177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Navigation Destination guidance

and hold harmless BMW of North America, sion or limitation of incidental or consequen‐
LLC. (“BMW NA”) and Total Traffic Net‐ tial damages, so those particular limitations
work, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against may not apply to you.
any and all claims, damages, costs or other ▷ The traffic bulletins are indicated on the map
expenses that arise directly or indirectly out by symbols.
of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic in‐
▷ The traffic bulletins for the surrounding area
cident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b)
are stored in a list.
your violation of this directive and/or (c) any
unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in The symbol in the function bar of the map
connection herewith. view turns red if there are traffic bulletins
that affect the calculated route.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor‐
mational only. User assumes all risk of use.
Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their
Switching the reception on/off
suppliers make no representations about 1. "Navigation"
content, traffic and road conditions, route 2. Open "Options".
usability, or speed. 3. "Receive Traffic Info"
C. The licensed material is provided to li‐
censee “as is,” and “where is”. Total Traffic Opening the list of traffic bulletins
Network, including, but not limited to, any 1. "Navigation"
and all third party providers of any of the li‐
censed material, expressly disclaims, to the 2. "Map"
fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties 3. "Traffic Info"
or representations with respect to the li‐ First, traffic bulletins for the calculated route
censed material (including, without limita‐ are displayed.
tion, that the licensed material will be error-
The traffic bulletins are sorted by their dis‐
free, will operate without interruption or that
tance from the current position of the vehi‐
the traffic data will be accurate), express, im‐
cle.
plied or statutory, including, without limita‐
tion, the implied warranties of merchanta‐ 4. Select a traffic bulletin.
bility, non-infringement fitness for a "More information": display additional
particular purpose, or those arising from a information.
course of dealing or usage of trade. 5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or if required.
BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
special, consequential, exemplary, or inci‐ Traffic bulletins on the map
dental damages (including, without limita‐ "Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
tion, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or
The Control Display changes to a black and
profits relating to the same) arising from any
white display. This enables a better view of the
claim relating directly or indirectly to use of
traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disre‐
the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Net‐
garded in this setting. Symbols and special des‐
work, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the
tinations are not displayed.
possibility of such damages. These limita‐
tions apply to all claims, including, without 1. "Navigation"
limitation, claims in contract and tort (such 2. "Map"
as negligence, product liability and strict li‐
ability). Some states do not allow the exclu‐ 3. Open "Options".

178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Destination guidance Navigation

4. "Settings" Traffic bulletins of the selected category are dis‐


5. "Traffic conditions/gray map" played on the map.
▷ Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the route
Symbols in the map view are always shown.
Depending on the scale of the map and the lo‐ ▷ For your own safety, traffic bulletins that no‐
cation of the traffic obstruction along the route, tify you of potentially dangerous situations,
the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis‐ such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hid‐
played. den.

Additional information in the map view Destination guidance with traffic


Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc‐ bulletins
tion's length, direction, and impact are displayed
in the map using triangles or gray bars along the General information
calculated route. Detour suggestions from the navigation system
▷ Red: traffic congestion can be manually accepted when using semi-dy‐
namic destination guidance. When using dy‐
▷ Orange: stop-and-go traffic
namic destination guidance, they are automati‐
▷ Yellow: heavy traffic cally accepted for route guidance.
▷ Green: clear roads
▷ Gray: general traffic bulletins such as road Semi-dynamic destination guidance
construction When traffic bulletin reception is switched on,
The displayed information depends on the par‐ semi-dynamic destination guidance is active.
ticular traffic information service. The destination guidance system takes the
available traffic bulletins into account. A mes‐
Filtering traffic bulletins sage is displayed depending on the route, the
You can set which traffic bulletins appear on the traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes.
map. If possible, a detour is offered in case of traffic
obstructions.
1. "Navigation" The upper part of the message shows:
2. "Map" ▷ Symbol of the first traffic obstruction, pos‐
3. Open "Options". sibly with the distance to the beginning of
4. "Traffic Info categories" the obstruction.
5. Select the desired category. ▷ Total length of the traffic obstructions on the
route.
▷ Time by which the trip is extended due to the
traffic obstructions.
The lower part of the message shows:
▷ Detour recommendation with the distance
to the beginning of the detour.
▷ Difference between the length of the new
route compared to the original route.

179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Navigation Destination guidance

▷ Time gained if the detour is taken compared


to the original route with the traffic obstruc‐
tions.
Both the original route, shown in white, and the
detour are displayed on the split screen.

Accepting the detour


"Detour"
In the event of special hazards, e. g., objects on
the road, a message is displayed without a de‐
tour suggestion.
Detours can also be accepted if the traffic mes‐
sages are called up in the list.

1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
4. "Detour information"
5. "Detour"

Dynamic destination guidance


The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions.
▷ The system does not point out traffic ob‐
structions along the original route.
▷ Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on
the map.
▷ Depending on road type and the kind and
extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu‐
lated route may lead through the traffic ob‐
struction.
▷ Dangerous situations are displayed regard‐
less of the setting.

Activating dynamic destination guidance


1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"

180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
What to do if... Navigation

What to do if...
Vehicle equipment ▷ Spoken instructions are no longer output
during route guidance in front of intersec‐
This chapter describes all series equipment as tions?
well as country-specific and special equipment
The area has not yet been fully recorded, or
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
you have left the recommended route and
describes equipment that may not be found in
the system requires a few seconds to cal‐
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
culate a new route suggestion.
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.

What to do if...
▷ The current transmission position cannot be
displayed?
The vehicle is located in an unrecognized
region, is in a poor reception area, or the
system is currently determining the posi‐
tion. Reception is usually best when you
have an unobstructed view of the sky.
▷ The destination without street information is
not used for route guidance?
When city has been input, no downtown can
be determined. Input any street in the se‐
lected city and start destination guidance.
▷ The destination is not used for route guid‐
ance?
The destination data are not contained in the
navigation data. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
▷ Letters for destination input cannot be se‐
lected?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination. Select a goal that is as close
as possible to the original.
▷ Is the map displayed in shades of gray?
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
The Control Display changes to a black and
white display. This enables a better view of
the traffic bulletins.

181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment
This chapter helps assure your enjoyment when
receiving radio stations and playing CDs, DVDs,
and tracks from the music collection.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500


Entertainment Tone

Tone
Vehicle equipment 3. Select the desired tone settings.

This chapter describes all series equipment as


well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.

4. To adjust: turn the controller.


General information 5. To store: press the controller.
The sound settings are stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Equalizer
Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.
Treble, bass, balance, and
fader Adjusting the equalizer
▷ "Treble": treble adjustment. 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"

▷ "Bass": depth adjustment. 2. "Tone"

▷ "Balance": left/right volume distribution. 3. "Equalizer"

▷ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution. 4. Select the desired setting.

Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader


1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"

5. To adjust: turn the controller.


6. To store: press the controller.

184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Tone Entertainment

Multi-channel playback, Adjusting the volume


surround 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
Choose between stereo and multi-channel play‐
back, surround. 3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
Setting multi-channel playback,
surround
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Surround"

5. To adjust: turn the controller.


6. To store: press the controller.

Resetting the tone settings


When surround is activated, multi-channel play‐ All tone settings can be reset to the default set‐
back is simulated when a stereo audio track is ting.
played.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
Volume 3. "Reset"
▷ "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume
control.
▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal compared
to the entertainment sound output.
▷ "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the
safety belt reminder, compared to the en‐
tertainment sound output.
▷ "Microphone": volume of the microphone
during a phone call.
▷ "Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers
during a phone call.
The following volumes are only stored for the
respective paired telephone: "Microphone",
"Loudspeak.".

185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment Radio

Radio
Vehicle equipment AM/FM station
This chapter describes all series equipment as
Selecting a station
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also 1. "Radio"
describes equipment that may not be found in 2. "FM" or "AM"
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected 3. Select the desired station.
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.

Controls

All saved stations are stored for the remote con‐


trol currently in use.

Changing the station


Turn the controller and press it

1 Volume, on/off or

2 Change wave band Press the button


3 Change entertainment sources
or
4 Change station/track
Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
5 Programmable memory buttons
page 12.

Storing a station
Sound output 1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
Switching on/off
When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF
button on the radio.

Muting
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
radio.

186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Radio Entertainment

3. Highlight the desired station. 4. Open "Options".


5. "Rename to:"
If necessary, wait for the desired name to be
displayed.
The selected station name is added to the list of
current stations and stored stations.

RDS
RDS broadcasts additional information, such as
the station name, in the FM wave band.
4. Press the controller for an extended period.
5. Select the desired memory location. Switching the RDS on/off
The stations are stored for the remote control 1. "Radio"
currently in use. 2. "FM"
The stations can also be stored on the program‐ 3. Open "Options".
mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
4. "RDS"
Selecting a station manually
Station selection via the frequency.

1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. To select the frequency: turn the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐


rently in use.

HD Radio™ reception
Many stations broadcast both analog and digital
signals.
License conditions

To store the station: press the controller for an HD Radio™ technology manufactured under li‐
extended period. cense from iBiquity Digital Corp. U. S. and For‐
eign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Renaming a station Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq‐
uity Digital Corp.
An FM station with changing station names can
be renamed.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
1. "Radio" reception
2. "FM" 1. "Radio"
3. Select the desired station. 2. "FM" or "AM"

187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment Radio

3. Open "Options". Navigation bar overview


4. "HD Radio Reception"
Symbol Function
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use. Change the list view.
This symbol is displayed in the status line
Select the category.
when the audio signal is digital.
When tuning to a station with a digital signal, it Direct channel entry
may take several seconds for the station to be Timeshift
played back in digital quality.
In areas in which the station is not continuously Open the My Favorites category/
received in digital mode, the playback switches open a favorite.
between analog and digital reception. In this Manage the favorites.
case, switch off digital radio reception.
Traffic Jump
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional information The functions of the navigation bar symbols can
on the current track, such as the name of the ar‐ also be stored on the programmable memory
tist. buttons, refer to page 23.

1. Select the desired station. Managing a subscription


2. Open "Options". To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the
3. "Station info" channels, you must have reception. It is usually
at its best when you have an unobstructed view
Selecting a substation of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the
This symbol indicates that a main station also status line.
broadcasts additional substations. The station
name of the main station ends in HD1. Station Enabling channels
names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc. The Unsubscribed Channels category contains
all disabled channels.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Press the controller. 1. "Radio"
3. Select the substation. 2. "Satellite radio"
When reception is poor, the substation is muted 3. "Category"
for several seconds.

Satellite radio
General information
The channels are offered in predefined pack‐
ages. The packages must be enabled by tele‐
phone.

188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Radio Entertainment

4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate‐ Via the iDrive


gory. 1. "Radio"
5. Select the desired channel. 2. "Satellite radio"
The phone number and an electronic serial 3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate‐
number, ESN, are displayed. gory.
6. Select the phone number to have the chan‐ 4. Select the desired channel.
nel enabled.

You can unsubscribe from the channels again Via the button on the radio
via this phone number.
Press the button.

Unsubscribing from channels The next channel is selected.


1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio" Via direct channel entry
3. Open "Options". 1. "Radio"

4. "Manage subscription" 2. "Satellite radio"


3. "Set channel"
4. Turn the controller until the desired channel
is reached and press the controller.

Storing a channel
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category.
5. The phone number and an electronic serial
4. Select the desired channel.
number, ESN, are displayed.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan‐
nels.

Selecting channels
You can only listen to enabled channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.

189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment Radio

6. Press the controller again to confirm the is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buf‐
highlighted channel. fer is cleared when a new channel is selected.

Opening the timeshift function


1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"

7. Select the desired memory location.


The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The channels can also be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
▷ The red arrow shows the current playback
Changing the list view position.
The list view changes every time the first symbol ▷ The time difference to the live broadcast is
on the navigation bar is pressed. displayed next to the buffer bar.
Information on the channel is displayed. ▷ For live transmissions "live".
Symbol Meaning
Timeshift menu
Channel name

Artist Symbol Function

Go to the live broadcast


Track
Playback/pause
Selecting a category Next track
1. "Radio"
Previous track
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category" Fast forward
4. Select the desired category. Reverse

Automatic timeshift deactivated/ac‐


Timeshift
tivated
Approx. one hour of the program being broad‐
cast on the channel currently being listened to
is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must Automatic timeshift
be available. When the function is activated, audio playback
The stored audio track can be played with a de‐ is stopped automatically in the event of:
lay following the live broadcast. When the buffer ▷ Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system.

190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Radio Entertainment

▷ Muting. 4. "Add sports information"


The audio playback then continues with a time
delay.
To activate:

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
4. "Automatic time shift"
To deactivate:
5. Select the league.
"Automatic time shift"
6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.
Storing favorites
Opening the favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Available favorites are artist, track, game, If an activated favorite is played back, the fol‐
league, and team. lowing message appears for approx. 20 seconds
"Favorite alert!".
Storing the artist, track, or game "Favorites"
It is only possible to store favorites that are cur‐ Select the symbol while the message is shown.
rently being broadcast. The channel information
must be available.

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Select the artist, track, or game. The displayed favorite is played.
If there is no message, the system changes to
Storing the league or team the My Favorites category. All favorites currently
Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites being broadcast can be selected from a list.
from a selection list.
Managing the favorites
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio" Activating/deactivating the favorites
3. "Manage favorites" Favorites can be activated and deactivated
globally and individually.

1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor‐
ites.

191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment Radio

The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ Automatic update
rently in use. About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of
the channel names and positions. The update
Deleting favorites takes place automatically and may take several
1. "Satellite radio" minutes.
2. "Manage favorites"
Notes
3. Highlight the desired favorite.
▷ Reception may not be available in some sit‐
4. Open "Options".
uations, such as under certain environmen‐
5. "Delete entry" tal or topographic conditions. The satellite
radio has no influence on this.
Traffic Jump ▷ The signal may not be available in tunnels or
Traffic and weather information for a selected underground garages; next to tall buildings;
region is broadcast every few minutes. or near trees, mountains or other powerful
sources of radio interference.
Selecting a region
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio" Stored stations
3. Open "Options".
General information
4. "Set jump"
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur‐ Calling up a station
rently in use. 1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
Activating/deactivating the jump
3. Select the desired station.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio" Storing a station
3. "Jump to:" The station currently selected is stored.
Information for the selected region is broadcast
1. "Radio"
as soon as it is available.
2. "Presets"
A new panel opens.
3. "Store station"
Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".

Symbol Meaning

Information will be broadcast shortly.

Information is currently being broad‐


cast.

Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic


Jump.
4. Select the desired memory location.

192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Radio Entertainment

The list of stored stations is stored for the re‐


mote control currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the program‐
mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.

Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"

193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment CD/multimedia

CD/multimedia
Vehicle equipment CD/DVD
This chapter describes all series equipment as
Playback
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
Loading the CD/DVD player
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up.
special equipment or the country version. This Playback begins automatically.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Reading can take a few minutes with com‐
tems. pressed audio files.

Starting playback
Controls A CD/DVD is located in the CD/DVD player or in
the CD/DVD changer.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

1 Volume, on/off
2 Eject CD/DVD
3 CD/DVD drive
4 Change the entertainment source
5 Change station/track
6 Programmable memory buttons Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD player

... CD/DVD changer


Sound output
CD/DVD player, rear
Switching on/off
When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF Playable formats
button on the radio.
▷ DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
Muting
audio (video part only), DVD video.
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
▷ CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA.
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
radio.

194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
CD/multimedia Entertainment

▷ Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC, 2. Select the desired track to begin playback.
M4A.

Audio playback

Selecting the track using the button


Press the button for the appropriate di‐
rection as often as necessary until the
desired track is played back.

Selecting the track using the iDrive


Displaying information on the track
Audio CDs

If information about a track has been stored, it is


Select the desired track to begin playback. displayed automatically:
▷ Interpret.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files ▷ Album track.
Depending on the data, some letters and num‐ ▷ Number of tracks on the CD/DVD.
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor‐
▷ File name of track.
rectly.

1. Select the directory if necessary. Random playback


To change to a higher level directory: move 1. "CD/Multimedia"
the controller to the left. 2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment CD/multimedia

4. Open "Options". Playback


5. "Random" The video image is displayed on the Control Dis‐
play up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h; in
some countries, it is only displayed while the
parking brake is set or the automatic transmis‐
sion is in position P.

DVD video
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: all 4. "DVD menu"
tracks within the selected directory are played in
random order.
Random mode is switched off when the audio
source is changed and the ignition is switched
off.

Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.

5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.


Video playback
VCD/SVCD
Country codes
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Only DVDs with the code of the home region can
be played back; also refer to the information on 2. "CD/DVD"
the DVD. 3. Select a CD with video content.

Code Region 4. "Select track"


5. Select the desired track.
1 USA, Canada

2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af‐ Video menu


rica To open the video menu: turn the controller dur‐
ing playback.
3 Southeast Asia
Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.
4 Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand Symbol Function

5 Northwest Asia, North Africa Open DVD menu

6 China Starting playback

0 All regions Pause

Stop

196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
CD/multimedia Entertainment

Symbol Function 3. "Audio/language"

Next chapter

Previous chapter

Fast forward

Reverse

In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases ev‐


ery time the controller is pressed. To stop, start
playback. 4. Select the desired language.

DVD menu Selecting the subtitles


1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the The subtitles that are available depend on the
video menu. DVD.
2. "DVD menu" 1. Turn the controller during playback.
The DVD menu is displayed. The display de‐ 2. Open "Options".
pends on the contents of the DVD.
3. "Subtitles"
3. To select menu items: move the controller
4. Select the desired language or "Do not
and press it.
display subtitles".
To change to the video menu: turn the controller
and press it.

DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
the DVD.

Selecting the language


The languages that are available depend on the
DVD. Setting the brightness, contrast and color
1. Turn the controller during playback. 1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options". 2. Open "Options".
3. "Display settings"

197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment CD/multimedia

4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color" Selecting the camera angle


The availability of a different camera angle de‐
pends on the DVD and the current DVD track.

1. Turn the controller during playback.


2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.

5. Turn the controller until the desired setting Opening the main menu, back
is reached and press the controller. These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
Selecting the zoom use.
Display the video image on the entire screen.
CD/DVD changer
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options". In the glove compartment
3. "Additional options"
4. "Zoom mode"

The BMW CD/DVD changer for six CDs/DVDs is


located in the glove compartment.

Selecting a track
Controls and displays
DVD video:

1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is


displayed.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"
5. Select the desired track.
VCD/SVCD:
1 Empty CD/DVD compartments
1. "Select track"
2 LEDs on the CD/DVD slot
2. Select the desired track.

198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
CD/multimedia Entertainment

3 Buttons for CD/DVD compartments Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this
may cause it to jam and prevent it from being
4 CD/DVD slot
able to eject again.◀
5 Load CD/DVD compartments
After they are inserted, it may take several mi‐
nutes for the CDs/DVDs to be read in.
Loading the CD/DVD compartments
individually Removing a single CD/DVD

1. Press the button. 1. Press the button.


The LED on the first empty compartment 2. Select the CD/DVD compartment.
flashes.
The CD/DVD is partially ejected.
2. Select another compartment if necessary.
3. Remove the CD/DVD.
3. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash.
4. Insert a single CD or DVD in the middle. Removing all CDs/DVDs
The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically and
placed into the selected compartment. 1. Press the button for a longer period.
2. Remove the CDs/DVDs.
Sliding in CDs/DVDs
Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs Malfunctions
on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/
If all LEDs on the CD/DVD changer flash rapidly,
DVD or the CD/DVD changer could be damaged.
the system is malfunctioning.
Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this
To eliminate the malfunction:
may cause it to jam and prevent it from being
able to eject again.◀ 1. Press one of the buttons:

Loading all empty CD/DVD
compartments ▷

1. Press the button for a longer period.


The CD/DVD last inserted is ejected.
The LEDs on the empty CD compartments
2. Remove the CD/DVD.
flash.
If the LEDs stop flashing rapidly, the CD/DVD
2. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to begin
changer is functional again.
flashing and then insert each CD or DVD into
the center of the slot.
Audio playback
The CDs/DVDs are drawn in automatically
The audio track of a DVD can be played back
and placed into the empty compartments.
even if video playback is not possible in the ve‐
Sliding in CDs/DVDs hicle.
Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs Only the main film without the previews or extras
on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/ can be played back.
DVD or the CD/DVD changer could be damaged.

199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment CD/multimedia

Starting playback CDs and DVDs


A DVD is located in the DVD changer. Use of CDs/DVDs
1. "CD/Multimedia" ▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs
2. "CD/DVD" with labels applied, as these can be‐
come detached during playback due
3. Select the desired DVD. to heat buildup and can cause irrepar‐
able damage to the device.
Selecting a chapter using the button
▷ Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
Press the button repeatedly until the diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play
desired chapter is played. CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs;
otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam
Selecting a chapter using iDrive and no longer eject.

1. "CD/Multimedia" ▷ Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD


Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no
2. "CD/DVD"
longer eject.◀
3. Select the desired DVD.
4. Select the desired chapter. General malfunctions
▷ CD/DVD changers and players have been
Fast forward/reverse optimized for performance in vehicles. In
Press and hold the button. some instances they may be more sensitive
to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices
would be.
Selecting the language ▷ If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
The languages that are available depend on the whether it has been inserted correctly.
DVD.
Humidity
1. "CD/Multimedia"
High levels of humidity can lead to condensation
2. "CD/DVD" on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and
3. Select the desired DVD. temporarily prevent playback.
4. Open "Options".
Malfunctions involving individual CDs/
5. "Audio/language"
DVDs
6. Select the desired language.
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
Notes causes:

CD/DVD player and changer Self-recorded CDs/DVDs


Do not remove the cover ▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent data
officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do creation or recording processes, or poor
not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise, quality or old age of the blank CD/DVD.
severe eye damage can result.◀ ▷ Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with
a pen intended for this purpose.

200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
CD/multimedia Entertainment

Damage ▷ Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com‐


▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and pressed audio format. If available, informa‐
moisture. tion on the album, such as the artist, is
stored as well.
▷ Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
▷ CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
▷ Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD
over 122 ℉/50 ℃, high humidity or direct
or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as
sunlight.
an album. The WMA, MP3, M4A, and AAC
formats are stored. Individual tracks and di‐
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
rectories can be deleted later, Deleting a
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro‐ track and directory, refer to page 205.
tection feature by the manufacturer. This can
Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or
stored but cannot be played back.
can only be played to a limited extent.
Backing up music data
MACROVISION Regularly back up the music data; other‐
This product contains copyrighted technology wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard
that is based on multiple registered US patents disc.◀
and the intellectual property of the Macrovision
Music recognition technology and re‐
Corporation and other manufacturers. The use
lated data are provided by Gracenote®.
of this copy protection must be approved by
Gracenote is the industry standard in music rec‐
Macrovision. Media protected by this product -
ognition technology and related content deliv‐
unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - may
ery. For more information, please visit
only be used for private purposes. Copying of
www.gracenote.com.
this technology is prohibited.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
DTS Digital Surround™ copyright © 2000-2011 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2011 Gracenote.
Manufactured under license under U.S. This product and service may practice one or
Patent Numbers: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & and other #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
patents granted and registered in the USA and #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
worldwide. DTS and the logo are registered #6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend‐
trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the DTS ing. Some services supplied under license from
logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
rights reserved.
Storing from a CD/DVD
1. Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD player.
Music collection 2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
Storing music

General information
Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices
can be stored in the music collection on a hard
disc in the vehicle and played from there.

201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment CD/multimedia

4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player. Continuing the storage process
5. "Store in vehicle" 1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
4. "Continue storing"
Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin‐
ning of the track at which storage was inter‐
rupted.

Album information
During storage, information such as the name of
The music collection is displayed and the first
the artist is stored with the track, if this informa‐
track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the
tion is available in the vehicle database or on the
storage process, the tracks are played in se‐
CD.
quence.
To update the database, contact your service
Observe the following during the storage proc‐
center.
ess:
Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not Storing from a USB device
remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player as
To store music, a suitable device must be con‐
this will interrupt the storage process. You can
nected to the USB interface in the glove com‐
switch to the other audio sources without inter‐
partment.
rupting the storage process. Tracks from the
current CD/DVD that have already been stored ▷ Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi‐
can be called up. ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players
with a USB interface.
Interrupting storage ▷ Unsuitable devices: USB hard drives, USB
1. "CD/Multimedia" hubs, USB memory card readers with mul‐
tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from
2. "CD/DVD"
the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played via the
3. "Storing..." USB audio interface in the center armrest.
▷ File systems: standard file systems for USB
devices are supported. The FAT 32 format
is recommended.
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 143.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. "Cancel storing" 4. Open "Options".
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.

202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
CD/multimedia Entertainment

5. "Music data import/export" ▷ Select "A-Z search", refer to page 23,


6. "Import music (USB)" and input the desired entry.
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select other categories if you wish.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a certain
artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks
by that artist are then displayed.
7. "Start play"
Playing music The list of tracks is repeated automatically.

Music search Restarting the music search


All tracks for which additional information has "New search"
been stored can be accessed by the music
search. Tracks without additional information Music search by voice
can be called up via the corresponding album, Instructions for voice activation system, refer to
refer to page 204. page 25.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
1. Press the button on the steering
2. "Music collection"
wheel.
3. "Music search"
2. ›Music search‹
3. Open the desired category, e. g., ›Select
artist‹.
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
5. Select other categories if you wish.
To select a track directly: ›Title ...‹
Say the voice command and the name of the
desired track in a single command.

4. Select the desired category. Current playback


The list of tracks that was generated last by the
music search, or the album that was selected
last.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"

5. Select the desired entry.

203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment CD/multimedia

3. "Current playback" The first track is played automatically, if pos‐


sible.

4. Select the desired track, if necessary.


4. Change directories if needed to select
Top 50 tracks.
The 50 most frequently played tracks. To go up a level in the directory: move the
controller to the left.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection" Random playback
3. "Top 50" All tracks of the selection are played back in ran‐
4. Select the desired track, if necessary. dom order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Albums
2. "Music collection"
All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
dates. 3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Symbol Format

Audio CD

Compressed audio files

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Select the desired album.
Depending on the album, the tracks or the
subdirectories of the album are displayed.
Managing music

Albums

Renaming an album
The name of the album, if available, is automat‐
ically entered when the album is stored. If the

204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
CD/multimedia Entertainment

name is not available, it can be changed later if Free memory capacity


desired. Display the free memory capacity in the music
1. "CD/Multimedia" collection.
2. "Music collection" 1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Highlight the desired album. 2. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options". 3. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album" 4. "Free memory"

Music collection

Backing up the music collection


The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB device. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
6. Select the letters individually. Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur‐
ing a long trip.
Deleting an album 1. Starting the engine.
An album cannot be deleted while a track from 2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
that album is being played. face in the glove compartment, refer to
1. "CD/Multimedia" page 143.

2. "Music collection" 3. "CD/Multimedia"

3. Highlight the desired album. 4. "Music collection"

4. Open "Options". 5. Open "Options".

5. "Delete album"

Deleting a track and directory


A track cannot be deleted while it is being
played.
A directory cannot be deleted while a track from
that directory is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the directory or track.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"

205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment CD/multimedia

6. "Music data import/export" External devices


At a glance

Symbol Meaning

AUX-IN port

USB audio interface

Mobile phone audio interface

7. "Backup music on USB" Bluetooth audio

AUX-IN port

At a glance
▷ For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3
player. The sound is output on the vehicle
loudspeakers.
▷ Recommendation: use medium tone and
volume settings on the audio device. The
tone depends on the quality of the audio
Storing the music collection in the vehicle files.
When storing from the USB device, the existing
music collection in the vehicle is replaced. Connecting
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"

Deleting the music collection


1. "CD/Multimedia"
The AUX-IN port is in the center armrest.
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options". Connect the headphone connector or line-out
4. "Delete music collection" connector of the device to the AUX-IN port.

Playback
1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track on the audio device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"

206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
CD/multimedia Entertainment

3. If necessary, "External devices" connectivity of the music player in the mo‐


4. "AUX front" bile phone: Apple iPhone or mobile phones.

Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers. Playback is only possible if no audio device
is connected to the analog AUX-IN port.
Volume Due to the large number of different audio devi‐
The volume of the sound output is dependent ces available on the market, it cannot be ensured
on the audio device. If this volume differs mark‐ that every audio device/mobile phone is opera‐
edly from the volume of the other audio sources, ble on the vehicle.
it is advisable to adjust the volumes. Ask your service center about suitable audio de‐
vices/mobile phones.
Adjusting the volume
1. "CD/Multimedia" Audio files

2. If necessary "External devices" Standard audio files can be played back:

3. "AUX front" ▷ MP3.

4. "Volume" ▷ WMA.
▷ WAV (PCM).
▷ AAC, M4A.
▷ Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.

File system
Standard file systems for USB devices are sup‐
ported. The FAT 32 format is recommended.

Connecting
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and press the controller.

USB audio interface/mobile phone


audio interface

At a glance
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
They can be operated via iDrive.The sound is
output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
The USB audio interface is in the center armrest.
Connectors for external devices
▷ Connection via USB audio interface: Apple Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐ audio interface
ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that Connect using a flexible adapter cable.
are supported by the USB audio interface. Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the USB in‐
▷ Connection via snap-in adapter, refer to terface.
page 240, when equipped with extended The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup‐
ported by the USB audio interface.

207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment CD/multimedia

Connection of a USB device via the USB Track search


audio interface Selection is possible via:
Connect using a flexible adapter cable to protect ▷ Playback lists.
the USB audio interface and the USB device
▷ Information: type of music, artist, and, if
against physical damage.
available, composer, album, track.
Connect the USB device to the USB interface.
▷ Additionally for USB devices: file directory,
composer.
After connecting for the first time
Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in
Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or type
the Latin alphabet.
of music, as well as playback lists are transmit‐
ted into the vehicle. This may take some time,
Starting the track search
depending on the USB device and the number
of tracks. 1. "CD/Multimedia"
During transmission, the tracks can be called up 2. "External devices"
via the file directory. 3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Search"
Number of tracks
5. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre" or
Information from up to four USB devices or for "Artist".
approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the ve‐
hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than All entries are displayed in a list.
36,000 tracks are stored, information on exist‐ ▷ Open "A-Z search" and input the de‐
ing tracks may be deleted. sired entry. When a letter is entered, the
results are filtered using this letter as the
Copy protection first letter. If multiple letters are entered,
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man‐ all results that contain that sequence are
agement (DRM) cannot be played. displayed.
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
Playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.

6. Select other categories if you wish.


Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist
are to be displayed, call up that artist only.
All of the tracks by that artist are then dis‐
The playback starts with the first track. played.
The CD cover belonging to the track may appear 7. "Start play"
on the Control Display after several seconds.

208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
CD/multimedia Entertainment

Restarting a track search brake is set or if the automatic transmission is in


"New search" position P.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
Playback lists
2. "External devices"
Calling up playback lists.
3. Select the symbol.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 4. "Video"
2. "External devices" 5. Select the directory if necessary.
3. Select the or symbol. To go up a level in the directory: move the
4. "Playlists" controller to the left.
6. Select the desired video file to begin play‐
Current playback back.
List of tracks currently being played.
Video menu
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices" Symbol Function
3. Select the or symbol.
Next video file
4. "Current playback"
Previous video file
Random playback Double-click on an icon to play back
The current list of tracks is played back in ran‐ previous video file.
dom order.
1. "CD/Multimedia" Notes
2. "External devices" Do not expose the audio device to extreme en‐
vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
3. Open "Options".
peratures; refer to the audio device operating
4. "Random" instructions.
Depending on the configuration of the audio
Fast forward/reverse files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the
Press and hold the button. files may not play back correctly in each case.

Information on connection
Video playback ▷ The connected audio device is supplied with
a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the
At a glance device. Therefore, do not additionally con‐
Video playback via snap-in adapter is possible. nect the device to a socket in the vehicle;
They can be operated via iDrive. The sound is otherwise, playback may be compromised.
output on the vehicle loudspeakers. ▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
Playback
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
The video image is displayed on the Control Dis‐ lamps to the USB audio interface.
play up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h; in
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
some countries, it is only displayed if the parking

209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment CD/multimedia

▷ Do not use the USB audio interface to re‐ Pairing and connecting
charge external devices.
Pairing a device

Bluetooth audio To avoid becoming distracted and posing


an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐
At a glance cle's occupants and to other road users, only
pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.◀
▷ Music files on external devices such as audio
devices or mobile phones can be played 1. "CD/Multimedia"
back via Bluetooth. 2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
Use of a mobile phone as an audio source, 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
refer to page 232.
4. "Add new phone"
▷ Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
played.
▷ The sound is output on the vehicle loud‐
speakers.
▷ The volume of the sound output is depend‐
ent on the device. If necessary, adjust the
volume on the device.
▷ Up to four external devices can be paired
with the vehicle.

Requirements
▷ The device is suitable. Information at 5. Perform additional steps on the device, refer
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. to the device operating instructions: for in‐
▷ The device is ready for operation. stance, search for or connect the Bluetooth
▷ The ignition is switched on. device or a new device.
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer to The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
page 231, and on the device. on the device display.
▷ Bluetooth presettings must be made on the 6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
device, such as for a connection without the device display.
confirmation or visibility; refer to the device You are prompted by the iDrive or device to
operating instructions. enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum 7. Enter the passkey and confirm.
of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth pass‐
key. It is only required once for pairing.

210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
CD/multimedia Entertainment

8. Select the desired functions with which the Connecting the device
device is to be connected, for instance 1. "CD/Multimedia"
"Audio".
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
9. "OK"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.

If pairing was successful, the device is displayed


as connected.
White symbol : the device is active as an audio
White symbol : the device is active as an audio
source.
source.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer
to page 212. Playback

Connecting a specific device General information


A device that has already been paired can be ▷ The display of music track information de‐
connected as an active audio source. pends on the device.
Connecting is not possible when data is ex‐ ▷ Operation can takes place on the device or
changed via a mobile phone connected via Blue‐ iDrive.
tooth.
▷ Playback is interrupted when data is ex‐
changed via a mobile phone connected via
Requirements
Bluetooth.
If necessary, activate the audio connection of
the desired device from the list of paired devi‐ Starting playback
ces.
1. Connect the device.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)" 3. "External devices"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Configure phone"
7. Activate "Audio".
8. "OK"

211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment CD/multimedia

4. Select the symbol. 5. Open "Options".


6. "Remove phone from list"

5. Select the desired track from the list, if nec‐


essary.
What to do if...
Playback menu Information on suitable devices can be found at
Depending on the particular device, some of the www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
functions may not be available. Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 230.
Symbol Function The device is not supported by the vehicle.

Next track ▷ Perform a software update, refer to


page 213, if needed.
Fast forward: press and hold the
symbol. The device could not be paired or connected.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
Previous music track and the vehicle match? Enter the same
Reverse: press and hold the symbol. passkey on the device and via iDrive.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
Disconnecting the audio connection the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
1. "CD/Multimedia" ▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)" to the device or vehicle? Delete connections
with other devices if necessary.
3. Highlight the desired device.
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
4. Open "Options".
does it have only a limited remaining battery
5. "Configure phone" life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-
6. "Audio" in adapter or via a charging cable.
7. "OK" ▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐
ble that only one device can be connected
Unpairing a device to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device
from the vehicle and pair and connect only
1. "CD/Multimedia"
one device.
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
▷ The device no longer reacts? Switch the de‐
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio". vice off and on again.
4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired. ▷ Repeat the pairing procedure.
Music cannot be played back.

212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
CD/multimedia Entertainment

▷ Start the program for playing back music Updating software via USB
data on the device and select a track on the The software may only be updated when the ve‐
device if necessary. hicle is stationary.
▷ Switch the radio on and off again.
1. Store the file for the software-update in the
Music files can only be played back softly. main director of a USB flash drive.
▷ Adjust the volume settings on the device. 2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB in‐
Playback is disturbed when buttons are pressed terface of the USB audio interface in the
or by other messages on the device. center armrest. An update via the USB in‐
▷ Switch off the button tones and other signal terface in the glove compartment is not pos‐
tones on the device. sible.

Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or 3. "Settings"


traffic bulletin and is not resumed automatically. 4. "Software update"
▷ Switch the radio on and off again. 5. "Update software"
Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is
connected both via Bluetooth Audio and via the
extended connectivity of the music player in the
mobile phone.
▷ Disconnect one of the two connections; for
example, disconnect the audio connection,
refer to page 212, and restart playback.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, please
contact the hotline or service center. 6. If necessary, "USB".
7. "Start update"
Software Update
8. "OK"
The vehicle supports various external devices
All listed software updates are installed.
depending on the current software version. With
a software update, the vehicle can support new
cell phones or new external device, for example.
Restoring the previous version
The software version prior to the last software
▷ USB.
update can be restored.
Software updates and related current infor‐
The previous version can only be restored when
mation is available at www.bmw.com/up‐
the vehicle is stationary.
date.
1. "Settings"
Displaying the current version 2. "Software update"
The currently installed software is displayed. 3. "Restore previous version"
1. "Settings" 4. "OK" Double-click.
2. "Software update" All listed software updates are removed.
3. "Show current version"
Select desired version to display additional in‐
formation.

213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment CD/multimedia

Note
While the software is being updated or a previ‐
ous version is being restored, BMW Assist, Of‐
fice functions, and the connected devices are
temporarily unavailable. Wait several minutes
for the functions to become available again.

214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
DVD system in rear Entertainment

DVD system in rear


Vehicle equipment Controls
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.

General information
With the DVD system in the rear you can play
CDs and DVDs with audio, video and image data.
The DVD system can also play data from at‐
tached external audio and video devices. Audio
output is possible both via headphones and via
the vehicle speakers.
You can control the DVD system using the but‐
tons on the CD-/DVD player or using the remote 1 Display screen
control.
2 Infrared interface for headphones
Some functions are operated using the remote
control. 3 CD/DVD player
4 Headphone connection: jack plug
5 12 V sockets  139
Enabling DVD system
The DVD system can be enabled via iDrive. Folding in display screen
1. "Settings" When using the ski bag or when transporting
bulky pieces of luggage, the display screen
2. "Allow rear control"
should be folded in, as otherwise it may be dam‐
3. "Rear DVD system active" aged.
Note when the display screen is folded
down
When the screen is folded down, do not open
the lid of the center armrest or rest your arm on
the screen; otherwise, you may damage the
screen.◀

215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment DVD system in rear

Turn: right headphone volume and vehicle


volume

Connecting headphones
You can connect headphones with a jack plug or
operate them using the infrared interface.
To enable optimal use of the infrared interface,
1. Turn the display screen, arrow 1
use infrared headphones that comply with the
The display screen switches off. IEC 61603-2 standard.
2. Fold down the display screen, arrow 2. Compatible infrared headphones and informa‐
The display screen is folded out in the reverse tion about supported headphones are available
order. at your service center.
When using infrared headphones, it is important
not to interrupt the infrared connection between
CD/DVD player the headphones and the infrared interface. This
means that no obstacle should come between
Controls the two and that the cover of the infrared inter‐
face should not be covered or scratched. Un‐
favorable lighting conditions such as glare from
outside can interfere with reception.

Remote control

1 Press: switch the DVD system on/off


Turn: left headphone volume and vehicle
volume
2 Eject CD/DVD
3 Beginning of track
Stop 1 Menu navigation
Playback, pause, freeze frame 2 Volume for headphones with jack plug

Next track 3 Changing track or chapter during CD-, DVD-


or AUX playback, fast forward/rewind
4 CD/DVD slot
4 Headphones right/left
5 Connectors for external device: cinch sock‐
ets 5 Open start menu for DVD system

6 Press: switch the DVD system on/off

216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
DVD system in rear Entertainment

Menu navigation Sound output via speakers


You can use the thumbwheel and buttons 1 to
In addition to the headphones, you can also play
navigate through the menus.
the sound via the vehicle speakers.
▷ Turn the thumbwheel: select a menu item.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
▷ Press the arrow buttons: change between
fields. 2. "External devices"

▷ Press the button: activate the menu item. 3. "AUX rear"


4. "Volume"
Changing batteries 5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and press the controller.

Switching DVD system on/off


Press the button on the CD-/DVD player or un‐
der the desired screen.
The DVD system switches on automatically
when a CD or DVD is inserted.

1. Press the detent and remove the cover.


2. Change the batteries. The type and instal‐ Playing CD/DVD
lation position are marked on the bottom of
the battery compartment. Use the following menu items to access data
from a CD/DVD:
3. Close the cover.
▷ Video data via "DVD"
Take the used battery to a recycling cen‐
▷ Audio data via "CD"
ter or to your service center.
▷ Images "Photo"

Setting the language of the


DVD system
1. Select a CD/DVD track.
2. Press the button.
3. Select "Tone".
4. Press the button.
5. Switch to the top window.
6. Select "Language".
7. Press the button.
8. Select the desired language.
9. Press the button.

217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment DVD system in rear

Playing videos from CDs/ Video CDs (VCDs) and Super Video CDs
(SVCDs) can only be played if they do not have
DVDs a DVD-specific menu.
Country codes of DVDs
Eject CD/DVD
Your DVD player only plays DVDs with the cod‐
ing of your home region, e.g., Europe=2. The Press the button on the CD/DVD player. The
country codes supported by your DVD are con‐ DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
tained in the information on your DVD.
DVD control
An overview of the coding zones:
With the DVD control, you can select the title and
Code Region chapter, open the DVD-specific menu, and op‐
erate functions such as Language, Fast forward
1 USA, Canada
and Reverse or Freeze frame.
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af‐ A DVD can briefly deactivate functions of the
rica DVD control, under certain circumstances while
the entire DVD is being played. It is not possible
3 Southeast Asia
to operate the DVD control under these circum‐
4 Australia, Central and South America, stances. In this case, try to make the selection
New Zealand using the DVD-specific menu.

5 Northwest Asia, North Africa 1. Press the button on the remote control
during playback.
6 China

DVDs with the code 0 can be played on all devi‐


ces.

Starting playback
1. Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the la‐
beled side facing upward. The CD/DVD is
automatically pulled in.
▷ Playback begins automatically after a
2. Press the buttons on the remote control
few seconds.
or turn the thumbwheel to select the desired
▷ Otherwise: select "DVD". function.
2. If the DVD control or the DVD-specific menu 3. Press the button.
is displayed when a DVD is inserted, use the
remote control buttons for menu navigation Symbol Function
to select the desired option.
Or: Exit DVD control

Press the button on the CD/DVD player. "SET" Settings for playing DVDs.
You can control the playback with the buttons Start playback.
on the CD/DVD player or the DVD control.
Stop playback.

218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
DVD system in rear Entertainment

Symbol Function 3. Press the button on the CD/DVD player.


Fast forward/reverse is interrupted. The
Activate and deactivate freeze DVD will start play at the point selected.
frame.

Skip a chapter. Skipping chapter


You can change to the next or previous chapter
Fast forward/reverse. during playback.
"Menu" Open the DVD-specific menu. 1. Press the button on the remote control
during playback.
The DVD control disappears again after a short 2. Select the symbol.
time if you have not selected a function.
3. Press the button repeatedly, continuing
Or: until you reach the desired chapter.
Press the button on the remote control to Or:
exit the DVD control.
Press the button on the left or right on the
remote control repeatedly until you reach the
Fast forward/reverse
desired chapter.
Forward/reverse with DVD control
Freeze frame
1. Press the button on the remote control
during playback. 1. Press the button on the remote control
during playback.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Press the button.
4. Press the button several times to in‐
crease the fast forward/reverse speed.
The DVD playback will be distorted.
To cancel fast forward/reverse:

1. Select the symbol.


2. Press the button.
Or: 2. Select the symbol.
Press the button on the CD/DVD player. The 3. Press the button.
DVD will start play at the point selected. To continue playback:

1. Select the or symbol.


Forward/reverse with remote control
Press and hold the button until you reach 2. Press the button.
the desired point. As an alternative, you can also stop and continue
Or: playback with the button on the CD/DVD
player.
1. During playback, turn the thumbwheel. Fast
forward/reverse is interrupted.
2. Continue to turn the thumbwheel. The
speed is increased.

219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment DVD system in rear

Making settings for DVD ferent camera angles. These are usually only
1. Press the button during playback. briefly available.
▷ "Menu": open the DVD-specific menu.
▷ "Return": exit the menu, or:
Press the buttons on the remote con‐
trol.
Many DVDs offer dialogs and subtitles in various
languages or scene descriptions for the hearing
impaired. These functions are stored on the
DVD.
With some DVDs, it is only possible to select
2. Make the settings with the remote control: language, subtitles, camera angle, or title by us‐
▷ "Video settings": ing the DVD-specific menu. Consult the infor‐
▷ "Brightness", "Color", and "Contrast" mation accompanying your DVD.
on the screen.
Opening the DVD-specific menu
▷ After switching to the top window, you
can change other settings. Additional functions may be available on DVDs.
It is thus possible, for example, to select from
"Language": the system language of the
among several possible actions or to access in‐
DVD system
formation about the film.
"Display": background brightness of the
screen. 1. Press the button on the remote control
during playback.
▷ "Tone":
2. Select "Menu".
▷ "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": sepa‐
rately adjustable for the left and right 3. Press the button.
headphones and the infrared head‐ On some DVDs, you can use "Main menu"
phones. and "Title" to access additional menus in
▷ "Reset": the settings are reset to the de‐ which you can select music scenes, for ex‐
fault values. ample.
▷ "DVD format": To make a selection:
▷ "Standard" 1. Select the symbol.
▷ "Zoom": full-screen playback. 2. Press the button until the desired func‐
▷ "Language": language of the DVD playback. tion is selected.
The language advances one setting each 3. Select the arrow.
time the menu item is selected.
4. Press the button.
▷ "Subtitles": language of the subtitles or turn
To return to the start menu:
off the subtitles.
▷ "Title": select individual tracks on the DVD. 1. Select the arrow.
▷ "Angle of view": camera angle. 2. Press the button.
Information or symbols that appear during You can also select language, subtitles, camera
the playback of a film generally point out dif‐ angle, or title in the DVD-specific menu. Consult
the information accompanying your DVD.

220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
DVD system in rear Entertainment

Compressed video files Playback functions


1. Select a track.
Playback
2. Press the button.
1. Select the directory if necessary.
3. Select a menu item:
▷ "Pause": stop and continue playback.
▷ "Repeat track": repeat the selected
track.
▷ "Repeat directory": repeat the tracks in
the current directory.
4. Press the button.

2. Press the button. Playing audio tracks from CD/


3. Select a track. DVD
Starting playback
Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the labeled
side facing upward. The CD/DVD is automati‐
cally pulled in.
▷ Playback begins automatically after a few
seconds.
▷ Otherwise: select "CD".
Press the button.
4. Press the button.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files, refer to
5. Select "Play". page 223, can take approx. 1 minute to read,
6. Press the button. depending on their directory structure.
To change the directory: To play back audio tracks from a DVD, refer to
Compressed audio files, refer to page 223.
1. Select the directory.
To start playback if a CD is already in the drive:

1. Open the start menu with the remote con‐


trol.
2. Select "CD".

2. Press the button.

221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment DVD system in rear

3. Press the button. 2. Press the button.

As an alternative, you can also control the play‐ 3. Make the settings with the remote control:
back with the buttons on the CD/DVD player. ▷ "Tone":
To eject CD/DVD: ▷ "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": sepa‐
Press the button on the CD/DVD player. rately adjustable for the left and right
headphones and the infrared head‐
Selecting a track phones.
▷ "Reset": the settings are reset to the de‐
Buttons on CD/DVD player fault values.
Press the button for the corresponding ▷ "Pause": stop and continue playback.
direction repeatedly until you reach the desired
▷ "Random": the CD tracks are played back
track.
once in random sequence.
Playback begins at the start of the track.
▷ "Scan": brief samples of all CD tracks are
automatically played one after another.
Using the remote control
▷ "Repeat": repeat the current track. Select
Press the button for the corresponding again to end.
direction repeatedly or turn the thumbwheel un‐
To exit from the menu:
til you reach the desired track.
Playback begins at the start of the track. Press the buttons on the remote control.

Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the CD/DVD player:
Press and hold the button for the cor‐
responding direction.

Settings and playback functions for


audio CDs
1. Select "SET".

222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
DVD system in rear Entertainment

Compressed audio files Settings and playback functions for


compressed audio files
Playback 1. Select a track.
1. Select the directory if necessary. 2. Press the button.
3. Make the settings with the remote control:
▷ "Tone":
▷ "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": sepa‐
rately adjustable for the left and right
headphones and the infrared head‐
phones.
▷ "Reset": the settings are reset to the de‐
fault values.
2. Press the button. ▷ "Pause": stop and continue playback.
3. Select a track. ▷ "Scan directory": briefly sample the tracks
in the current directory.
▷ "Scan all": briefly sample all tracks.
▷ "Random directory": play the tracks in the
current directory in a random sequence.
▷ "Random all": play all tracks in a random se‐
quence.
▷ "Repeat track": repeat the selected track.
▷ "Repeat directory": repeat the tracks in the
current directory.
4. Press the button.
▷ "Details": display any stored information on
5. Select "Play". the current track.
6. Press the button. To exit from the menu:
To change the directory: Press the buttons on the remote control.
1. Select the directory.

Displaying images from CD/


DVD
1. Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the la‐
beled side facing upward. The CD/DVD is
automatically pulled in.
2. Open the start menu with the remote con‐
trol.
3. Select "Photo".
2. Press the button.
4. Press the button.

223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment DVD system in rear

Displaying overview Adjusting


1. Select the subdirectory if necessary. 1. Press the button.
2. Select "Overview".

2. Select a menu item:


3. Press the button.
Symbol Function
It may take some time until the overview is com‐
pletely displayed. Return to the photo menu.
If a symbol appears instead of an image, the im‐
"SET" Adjust the "Display".
age cannot be displayed in the overview.
"Language": after switching to
Displaying images the top window, the system lan‐
guage can be changed.
1. Use the buttons or the thumbwheel of the
remote control to select an image. Start the slide show.
2. Press the button. Display the first/last image of the
current directory.

Rotate the image by 90°.

"Overview" Change to the image overview.

Ending display
1. Press the button.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Displaying images: 3. Press the button.
▷ Scroll using the menu navigation but‐
tons of the remote control. Eject CD/DVD
▷ Display the slide show: turn the thumb‐ Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
wheel to set the display duration of the
images.
Stop the slide show: select "Stop".

224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
DVD system in rear Entertainment

Information on CD/DVD Dual-sided DVDs available from retail suppliers


are coated on both sides and bear no markings.
player This means both sides are information carriers.
To play the information on the other side, turn
Safety notes
over the DVD.
Do not remove the cover
The BMW CD/DVD player is a Class 1 laser Supported formats
product. Do not operate if the cover is damaged; Depending on the compression method used,
otherwise, severe eye damage can result.◀ not all files of the specified formats can be
opened.
Suitable media
Images
Use of CDs/DVDs
▷ JPEG/JPG.
▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs
with labels applied, as these can be‐ With very large image files, it can take longer for
come detached during playback due the images to be displayed.
to heat buildup and can cause irrepar‐
able damage to the device. Compressed audio files
▷ Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard ▷ MP3.
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play ▷ WMA.
CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs; ▷ OGG.
otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam
▷ AAC.
and no longer eject.
▷ Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD Compressed video files
Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no
▷ SVCD.
longer eject.◀
▷ MPEG1.
The CD/DVD player can play the following me‐
dia: ▷ MPEG2.

▷ Video DVD. ▷ MPEG4/DivX.

▷ CD-DA (audio CD).


Digital Rights Management (DRM)
▷ CDs/DVDs with compressed image data.
In some cases, it may not be possible to play
▷ CDs/DVDs with compressed audio data. CDs/DVDs with integrated Digital Rights Man‐
▷ CDs/DVDs with compressed video data. agement (DRM).
The DVD player does not support DVD audio.
However, many audio DVDs available in stores General malfunctions
also contain a video track in the DVD Video for‐ ▷ CD/DVD changers and players have been
mat in addition to the audio track. These DVDs optimized for performance in vehicles. In
can be played back by the DVD player. Refer to some instances they may be more sensitive
the information on your DVD to determine to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices
whether your audio DVD contains an additional would be.
video track. Depending on the authoring used, it ▷ If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
is possible that not all functions are available whether it has been inserted correctly.
during playback.

225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Entertainment DVD system in rear

Foreign bodies/liquids in the CD/DVD slot CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files
Make sure that no foreign objects or liq‐ If the language set for the CD/DVD player does
uids get into the CD/DVD slot; otherwise, the not match the language of the music track, the
CD/DVD player will be damaged.◀ music tracks may be displayed incorrectly.

Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensation External device
on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and
temporarily prevent playback. Connecting

Malfunctions involving individual CDs/


DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes.

Copied or self-recorded CDs/DVDs


▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with
home-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent 1 Connections for audio/video cables. Watch
data creation or recording processes, or the colors of the sockets when connecting.
poor quality or old age of the blank CD/DVD. Yellow socket: video
▷ Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with White socket: audio on left
a pen intended for this purpose.
Red socket: audio on right

Damaged CDs/DVDs 2 Power supply for external device: socket


with removable cap.
▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and
moisture.
▷ Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve. Playback
1. Switch on the external device and start the
▷ Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
playback.
over 122 ℉/50 ℃, high humidity or direct
sunlight. 2. Open the start menu with the remote con‐
trol.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection 3. Select "AUX".
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro‐
tection feature by the manufacturer. As a result,
some CDs/DVDs cannot be played, can only be
played to a limited degree, or cause the system
to switch off. In this case, wait a short while and
then switch the system back on again. Then re‐
move the CD/DVD from the drive.

4. Press the button.

226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
DVD system in rear Entertainment

For devices without a video signal, for instance "Display": background brightness of the
MP3 players, "No video signal" appears on the screen.
display. The sound is nevertheless played. ▷ "Video Format":
▷ "Standard"
Settings for external devices
▷ "Zoom": full-screen playback.
1. Press the button during playback.
To exit from the menu:
Press the buttons on the remote control.

2. Make the settings with the remote control:


▷ "Video settings":
▷ "Brightness", "Color", and "Contrast" of
the video playback.
▷ "NTSC color": the color can be adjusted
on an external device with the NTSC
standard.
▷ "Standard": the DVD system can be
adapted to external devices with differ‐
ent TV standards; to do so, consult the
operating manual of the external device.
▷ "Reset": the settings are reset to the de‐
fault values.
▷ "Tone":
▷ "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": sepa‐
rately adjustable for the left and right
headphones and the infrared head‐
phones.
▷ "Reset": your settings are reset.
▷ After switching to the top window, you
can change other settings.
"Audio": adjust the volume of the exter‐
nal device to the volume of the CD/DVD
player.
"Language": the system language of the
DVD system.

227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Communication
All of the options available to you for mobile
communication with family, friends, business
partners, and service providers are described in
this chapter.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500


Communication Telephone

Telephone
Vehicle equipment Snap-in adapter
The snap-in adapter is used to:
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment ▷ Hold the mobile phone.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also ▷ Recharge the battery.
describes equipment that may not be found in ▷ Connect the mobile phone to an outside an‐
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected tenna of the vehicle.
special equipment or the country version. This
This provides for better network reception
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
and consistent sound quality.
tems.

Approved mobile phones


At a glance Details on which mobile phones and external
devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup‐
The concept ported by the mobile phone preparation pack‐
age can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/blue‐
Mobile phones or other external devices such as
tooth.
audio players can be connected to the vehicle
via Bluetooth.
Displaying the vehicle identification
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐ number and software part number
tooth® SIG, Inc.
The vehicle identification number and software
After these devices are paired once, they are part number are needed to determine which mo‐
recognized automatically when the ignition is bile phones are supported by the mobile phone
switched on as soon as they are in the vehicle preparation package. The software version of
and can then be operated via iDrive, the buttons the mobile phone may also be required.
on the steering wheel, and via voice activation.
1. "Telephone"
Depending on their functionality, external devi‐
ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone 2. Open "Options".
or as an audio source. The telephone functions 3. "Bluetooth® info"
are described in the following. Operating the au‐ 4. "Display system information"
dio functions, refer to page 210.
These approved mobile phones with a certain
Up to four external devices can be paired. software version, support the vehicle functions
Certain functions may need to be enabled by the described below.
mobile phone provider or service provider. Malfunctions may occur with other mobile
Using the mobile phone while driving phones or software versions.
Make entries only when traffic and road Do not operate a mobile phone that is connected
conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, as
in your hand while you are driving; use the this may lead to a malfunction.
hands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐ A software update, refer to page 213, can be
serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve‐ performed if necessary.
hicle occupants and other road users.◀

230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Telephone Communication

Notes 2. Open "Options".


At high temperatures, the charging function of 3. "Bluetooth®"
the mobile phone may be limited and functions
may not be executed.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
note the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.

Pairing/unpairing the mobile


phone
General information Additional functions
The following functions are available:
Activating/deactivating the additional
▷ Use of a mobile phone as a telephone.
functions
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an additional tele‐ Activate the functions before pairing to be able
phone. to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit‐
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an audio source. able mobile phones, refer to page 230, that sup‐
▷ Use of an audio device as an audio source, port this function.
refer to page 210. 1. "Telephone"

Requirements 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"

▷ The mobile phone is suitable, refer to 3. Open "Options".


page 230. 4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation. 5. Select the desired additional function.
▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on ▷ "Additional telephone"
the mobile phone. ▷ "Office"
▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be made ▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
on the mobile phone, e.g., for a connection
6. "OK"
without confirmation or visibility, refer to the
mobile phone operating instructions. An additional function cannot be assigned to a
telephone while it is deactivated.
▷ Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum Additional telephone
of 16 digits was defined as the Bluetooth
A mobile phone can be used as an additional
passkey. It is only required once for pairing.
telephone.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
The additional telephone can be used to accept
incoming calls, refer to page 234. While a call is
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
active on the additional telephone, received
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply calls are displayed on the Control Display.
with all safety guidelines and regulations.

1. "Telephone"

231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Communication Telephone

Audio source Gray symbol: the function is inactive.


A mobile phone can be used as an audio source. Symbol Function

Pairing and connecting a mobile phone Telephone.

Pairing the mobile phone Additional telephone.


To avoid becoming distracted and posing Audio source.
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐
cle's occupants and to other road users, only
pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta‐ Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve‐
tionary.◀ hicle at once. Three mobile phones can be con‐
nected with the vehicle at once.
1. "Telephone" If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" to page 233.
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
Following the initial pairing
played. ▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile
when the engine is running or the ignition is
phone, refer to the mobile phone operating
switched on.
instructions: for instance, search for or con‐
nect the Bluetooth device or a new device. ▷ The phone book entries of the telephone
stored on the SIM card or mobile phone are
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
transmitted to the vehicle after detection,
on the mobile phone display.
depending on the mobile phone.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
▷ Four mobile phones can be paired.
the mobile phone display.
▷ Specific settings may be necessary in some
6. You are prompted by the iDrive or mobile
mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se‐
phone to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
cure connection; refer to the mobile phone
Enter the passkey and confirm.
operating instructions.
or
Compare the control number on the vehicle Connecting a particular mobile phone
display with the control number on the mo‐ 1. "Telephone"
bile phone display. Confirm the control num‐
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
ber on the mobile phone and in the vehicle.
3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con‐
"OK"
nected.
7. Select the functions for which the mobile
The functions assigned to the mobile phone be‐
phone is to be used.
fore unpairing are assigned to the mobile phone
8. "OK" when it is reconnected. These functions are de‐
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone activated in a mobile phone that is already con‐
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones. nected.
The functions supported by the mobile phone
and audio device are displayed as symbols when
paired.
White symbol: the function is active.

232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Telephone Communication

Configuring the mobile phone 4. Open "Options".


Additional functions can be activated or deacti‐ 5. "Remove phone from list"
vated for paired and connected mobile phones.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Highlight the mobile phone to be config‐
ured.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. At least one function must be selected.
▷ "Telephone"
What to do if...
▷ "Additional telephone" Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
▷ "Audio" page 230.
7. "OK" The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐
If a function has already been assigned to an‐ nected.
other connected mobile phone, the function is ▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on
deactivated in that mobile phone and the mobile the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the
phone is unpaired when the function is assigned vehicle and on the mobile phone.
to a new mobile phone. ▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
Swapping the telephone and additional same passkey on the mobile phone and via
telephone iDrive.
The function of the telephone and additional tel‐ ▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
ephone can be swapped automatically. the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
1. "Telephone" ▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con‐
nections with other devices if necessary.
3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"
▷ Is the audio connection activated? Deacti‐
Unpairing the mobile phone vate the audio connection.
1. "Telephone" ▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
does it have only a limited remaining battery
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-
3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be un‐ in adapter or via the charging cable.
paired.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐
ble that only one mobile phone can be con‐
nected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected
mobile phone from the vehicle and pair and
connect only one mobile phone.
The mobile phone no longer reacts.
▷ Switch the mobile phone off and on again.

233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Communication Telephone

▷ Is the ambient temperature too high or low? Controls


Do not expose the mobile phone to extreme
environmental conditions. Adjusting the volume
The telephone functions are not available.
▷ Is the mobile phone paired as an additional
telephone and is the additional telephone
function deactivated? Activate the function.
▷ Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect
the mobile phone as a telephone.
No phone book entries or only some phone book
entries are displayed, or they are incomplete.
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete. Turn the knob until the desired volume is se‐
lected. The setting is stored for the remote con‐
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
trol currently in use.
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
transmitted. The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of
▷ It may not be possible to display phone book the microphone on the telephone and the vol‐
entries with special characters. ume of the called party. Depending on the mo‐
bile phone, the volumes may need to be ad‐
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
justed. The settings can only be created during
stored is too high.
a call and must be adjusted separately for each
▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large, telephone. The settings are deleted when the
e. g., due to stored information such as telephone is unpaired.
notes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐
tact. 1. "Settings"
▷ Is the mobile phone connected as an audio 2. "Tone"
source or additional telephone? The mobile 3. "Volume settings"
phone must be connected as a telephone.
4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone" or
The phone connection quality is poor. "Loudspeak."
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the 5. To adjust: turn the controller.
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
6. To store: press the controller.
on the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in Incoming call
adapter or place it in the area of the center
console. Receiving calls
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
loudspeakers separately. book and is transmitted by the network, the
If all points in this list have been checked and the name of the contact is displayed. Otherwise,
required function is still not available, contact only the phone number is displayed.
Customer Relations or the service center. If more than one phone number is assigned to a
contact, only the name of the contact is dis‐
played.

234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Telephone Communication

For calls on the additional telephone, the num‐ Entering a phone number
ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the
network. Dialing a number
An incoming call to one of the telephones is au‐ 1. "Telephone"
tomatically rejected if there is an active call on 2. "Dial number"
the other telephone.
3. Select the digits individually.
Accepting a call 4. Select the symbol.

Press the button on the steering wheel.

or
"Accept"

The phone number can also be entered by voice.

Calls with multiple parties

General information
You can switch between calls or connect two
Rejecting a call calls to a single conference call. These functions
"Reject" must be supported by the mobile phone and
service provider.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel. Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
or This function might have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone must be
1. "Telephone" adjusted accordingly.
2. "End call" If a second call comes in during an ongoing call,
a call waiting signal is sounded.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.

Establishing a second call


Establish an additional call during an active call.

1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Hold"

235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Communication Telephone

The existing call is put on hold. DTMF suffix dialing


DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac‐
cess to network services or for controlling devi‐
ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an answer‐
ing machine. The DTMF code is needed for this
purpose.
1. "Telephone"
2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial
number".
3. "Keypad dialing"
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list. 4. Enter the DTMF code via iDrive.
"Return"
Phone book
The call on hold is resumed.
Displays
Switching between two calls, hold call
The phone book accesses the contacts and
The active call is displayed in color. shows all contacts for which a phone number
The call on hold is displayed in gray. has been stored. The entries can be selected to
"Swap calls" make a call.

The call on hold is resumed. 1. "Telephone"


2. "Phone book"
Establishing a conference call
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
Two calls can be connected to a single tele‐ contacts.
phone conference call.

1. Establish two calls.


2. "Conference call"
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended. If one call is terminated by another
party, the other call can be continued.

Switching the microphone to mute


When a call is active, the microphone can be
muted.

1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Microphone mute"
A microphone that has been switched to mute
is automatically reactivated:
▷ When a new connection is established.
▷ When switching between call parties.

236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Telephone Communication

Calling a contact Dialing the number via the iDrive


1. "Telephone"
Symbol Meaning
2. "Redial"
Contact with one stored phone num‐
ber.

Contact with more than one stored


phone number.

Call not possible; mobile phone with‐


out reception or network, or Service
Request is active.

For contacts with one stored phone number: se‐ 3. Select the desired entry and the phone num‐
lect the required contact. The connection is be‐ ber if necessary.
ing established.
The connection is established.
For contacts with more than one stored phone
number: select the required contact and the Deleting a single entry or all entries
phone number. The connection is being estab‐
The deletion of entries depends on your partic‐
lished.
ular mobile phone.
Editing a contact 1. Highlight the entry.
Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a 2. Open "Options".
contact is changed, the changes are not stored 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
stored in the vehicle. Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the contact. 1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options". 2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry" 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
The contact can be edited. contact"
4. Select the contact if necessary.
Redialing 5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
General information
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone
7. "Store contact"
is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the
mobile phone. Possibly only those numbers are
displayed that were dialed from the vehicle. Received calls
The 20 phone numbers dialed last are displayed. Displaying calls
The sorting order of the phone numbers de‐
The 20 calls that were last received are dis‐
pends on the particular mobile phone.
played.
1. "Telephone"

237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Communication Telephone

2. "Received calls" From the mobile phone to the hands-


free system
Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth
range of the vehicle can be continued on the
hands-free system with the ignition switched
on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the system au‐
tomatically switches to the hands-free system.
If the system does not switch over automatically,
follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐
play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
Calling a number from the list instructions.
Selecting an entry.
The connection is established. From the hands-free system to the
mobile phone
Deleting a single entry or all entries Calls that are made on the hands-free system
The deletion of entries depends on your partic‐ can in some cases be continued on the mobile
ular mobile phone. phone; this depends on the mobile phone.
Follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐
1. Highlight the entry.
play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
2. Open "Options". instructions.
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"

Saving an entry in the contacts Voice operation


1. Highlight the entry.
General information
2. Open "Options".
Vehicles equipped with the voice activation sys‐
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
tem: operation, refer to page 25.
contact"
Vehicles not equipped with the voice activation
4. Select the contact if necessary.
system: depending on the equipment, the mo‐
5. Select the type of number: "Home", bile phone can be voice operated as described
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other" below.
6. Complete the entries if necessary. The list of short commands in the Owner's
7. "Store contact" Manual does not apply to this type of voice op‐
eration.
Hands-free system
The concept
General information ▷ The mobile phone can be operated without
Calls that are being made on the hands-free taking your hands from the steering wheel.
system can be continued on the mobile phone ▷ In many cases, the entries are accompanied
and vice versa. by announcements or questions.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
operation system.

238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Telephone Communication

▷ ››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the The system says: »Dialing number«.
voice operation system.
Calling
Using voice activation
Dialing a phone number
Activating the voice activation system 1. ›Dial number‹
2. Say the phone number.
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel. 3. ›Dial‹
2. Say the command.
Correcting the phone number
Terminating the voice activation The sequence of digits can be deleted after the
system system has repeated the digits.
›Correct number‹
Press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹. The command can be repeated as often as nec‐
essary.

Possible commands Deleting a phone number


Having possible commands read aloud ›Delete‹
All digits entered up to that point are deleted.
Press the button on the steering wheel.
›Help‹. Redialing
Possible commands are announced. ›Redial‹
The digits from zero to nine are recognized. The
Voice phone book
digits can be spoken separately or combined in
a sequence to accelerate the entry. Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it
may be necessary to create your own voice
Using alternative commands phone book.
The system often recognizes a number of dif‐ The entries must be entered using voice activa‐
ferent commands to run a function; for instance: tion and are separate from the memory in the
mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.
›Dial name‹ or ›Name‹
Saving an entry
Example: dialing a phone number
1. ›Save name‹
1. Press the button on the steering 2. Say the name. Do not exceed the speaking
wheel. duration of approx. 2 seconds.
2. ›Dial number‹ 3. Say the phone number after being prompted
The system says: »Please say the number«. to do so by the system.

3. For instance, ›123 456 790‹ 4. ›Save‹

The system says: »123 456 790. Continue?


Deleting an entry
«.
1. ›Delete name‹
4. ›Dial‹

239
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Communication Telephone

2. Say the name after being prompted to do so. Environmental conditions


3. Confirm the prompt: ›Yes‹ ▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
Deleting all entries sis, and speed.
1. ›Delete phone book‹ ▷ Always say commands in the language of
2. Confirm the prompt: ›Yes‹ the system. The language for the mobile
phone voice operation is preset and cannot
3. Confirm the prompt again: ›Yes‹
be changed in the Control Display.

Reading and selecting entries ▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof
closed to prevent noise interference.
1. ›Read phonebook‹
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
2. When the desired entry is read aloud:
while speaking.
say ›Dial number‹

Selecting an entry
Snap-in adapter
1. ›Dial name‹
2. Say the name after being prompted to do so. General information
3. Confirm the prompt: ›Yes‹ More information on compatible snap-in adapt‐
ers that support the functions of the mobile
Adjusting the volume phone is available at the service center.

Notes
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and functions
may not be executed.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
note the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.

Turn the knob during an announcement. Installation position


In the center armrest.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed. Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter
▷ The volume is stored for the remote control 1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.
currently in use.

Notes
Do not use voice operation to initiate an Emer‐
gency Request. In stressful situations, the voice
and vocal pitch can change. This can unneces‐
sarily delay the establishment of a telephone
connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 300, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.

240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Telephone Communication

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar‐ Removing the mobile phone
row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en‐
gages.

Press the button and remove the mobile phone.

3. To remove the snap-in adapter: press but‐


ton 1.

Inserting the mobile phone


1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove
the protective cap from the antenna con‐
nector and from the USB connection of the
mobile phone.
2. With the buttons facing up, slide the mobile
phone up toward the electrical contacts and
press it down until it engages.

The battery is charged beginning with the radio


ready state of the vehicle.

241
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Communication Office

Office
Vehicle equipment ▷ The time, time zone, and date, refer to
page 85, are correctly set on the Control
This chapter describes all series equipment as Display and on the mobile phone, for in‐
well as country-specific and special equipment stance to correctly display appointments.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
▷ Office is activated, refer to page 231.
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
Updating
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Data are updated every time the mobile phone
tems. is connected to the vehicle. Appointment en‐
tries, tasks, notes and reminders can be updated
separately.
At a glance 1. "Office"
2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
General information "Notes" or "Reminders"
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes‐
3. Open "Options".
sages, and e-mails from the mobile phone can
be displayed on the Control Display if the mobile 4. "Update data"
phone provides compatible support of these Cell phone data are transmitted again to the
functions and the necessary Bluetooth stand‐ vehicle.
ards.
Information about which mobile phones support
the Office functions can be found at Office information
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. A limited number
The number of unread messages and active
of compatible mobile phones is available for Of‐
tasks as well as the upcoming appointments are
fice.
displayed.
Contents are only displayed in full length when
the vehicle is stationary. 1. "Office"

The mobile phone has read-access only. 2. "Current office"


3. Select the desired entry to display details.
Do not use Office while driving
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf‐
fic and road conditions allow this.◀

Requirements
▷ A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle and connected. In some mobile
phones, data access must be confirmed on
the mobile phone.

242
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Office Communication

Contacts Dialing phone numbers


1. Select the desired contact.
Note 2. Select the phone number.
Equipment version with the mobile phone prep‐ The connection is established.
aration package.
Editing a contact
At a glance
1. Select the desired contact.
Contacts can be created and edited. The con‐
2. "Edit contact"
tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. The addresses can be adopted as des‐
tinations for navigation and the phone numbers
can be dialed.

Displaying contacts

General information
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts" 3. Change the entries.
4. "Store contact in vehicle"
When a contact is edited, the changes are not
stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry
is stored in the vehicle.

Selecting the contact as a navigation


destination
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select the address.
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De‐
When contacts from the mobile phone are
pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
used, the address may need to be matched
search is offered, refer to page 23.
to the navigation data contained in the vehi‐
A symbol indicates the storage location of the cle. In this case:
contacts.
Correct the address.
Symbol Storage location 3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
No sym‐ In the vehicle; the address has not
bol been checked as a destination.
Checking the address as a destination
In the vehicle; the address has An address that is to be used for destination
been checked as a destination. guidance must match the navigation data con‐
Mobile phone.

243
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Communication Office

tained in the vehicle. The address can be If necessary, "Accept address".


checked for this purpose. 9. "Store contact in vehicle"
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address. Contact types
2. Open "Options". Various contact types can be assigned to phone
numbers and addresses.
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary. Symbol Meaning

If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of Home phone number.


it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
Business phone number.
changed on the mobile phone.
Mobile phone number.
New contact
Other phone number.
General information Home address.
A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers,
2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter‐ Business address.
net address.

1. "Office"
Specifying the home address
A home address can be stored. It appears at the
2. "Contacts"
top of the contact list.
3. Open "Options".
1. "Office"
4. "New contact"
2. "Contacts"
3. "Home"
4. Create a contact.
5. "Store contact in vehicle"

Selecting the sorting order of the


names
Names can be displayed in a different order.

5. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐ 1. "Office"
ous entries: "Delete input fields" 2. "Contacts"
6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next 3. Open "Options".
to the entry field. 4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
7. Enter the text and assign the contact type. last name"
8. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation Depending on how the contacts were stored on
system: enter the address. Only addresses the mobile phone, the sorting order of the names
contained in the navigation data in the vehi‐ may differ from the selected sorting order.
cle can be entered. This ensures that desti‐
nation guidance is possible for all ad‐
dresses.

244
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Office Communication

Show contact pictures Displaying messages


Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in 1. "Office"
the vehicle when the mobile phone is connected 2. "Messages"
to the vehicle. The number of transmitted pic‐
A symbol identifies the type of message.
tures depends on the mobile phone. The mobile
phone must support this function. Symbol Message type
1. "Office" Text messages.
2. "Contacts"
My Info
3. Open "Options".
Message from the Concierge serv‐
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
ice.
5. "Show images"
E-mail from mobile phone.
Display of all contact pictures is activated or de‐
activated.
Filtering the message list
Deleting contacts The message list can be filtered if more than one
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are type of message exists.
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone can‐
1. "Filter:"
not be deleted.

1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Highlight the contact.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
6. If necessary. "Yes"

2. Select the type of message.


Messages ▷ "All"
General information All messages are displayed.
Whether or not text messages and e-mails from ▷ "E-mail"
the mobile phone are displayed depends on Only e-mails from the mobile phone are
whether transmission from the mobile phone to displayed.
the vehicle is supported. Text messages and e- ▷ "Service message"
mails may not be supported by the service pro‐
vider, or the function may need to be enabled Only messages from the BMW Assist
separately. After the mobile phone is first paired, Concierge service and My Info are dis‐
transmission may take several minutes. Mes‐ played.
sages are only displayed in full length when the ▷ "Text message"
vehicle is stationary. Messages from the addi‐ Only text messages from the mobile
tional telephone are not transmitted. phone are displayed.

245
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Communication Office

Deleting messages My Info


Messages from the Concierge service and
My Info can be deleted. Selecting additional functions
Delete a message: Additional functions are available when a mes‐
sage is selected.
1. "Office"
Symbol Function
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete message" "Call"
Delete all messages: If the message contains a number,
the connection is established.
1. "Office"
"Select phone number"
2. "Messages"
If the message contains more than
3. Open "Options".
one number, select the desired num‐
4. "Delete all messages" or "Delete service ber from the list. The connection is
messages" established.

Text messages
Message from the Concierge service
Calling the sender of a text message
Storing an address
1. Select the desired message.
1. Select the desired message.
2. Select the symbol.
2. Open "Options".
Saving the sender in the contacts 3. "Store contact in vehicle"
1. Highlight the desired message.
Selecting additional functions
2. Open "Options".
Additional functions are available when a mes‐
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
sage is selected.
contact"
Symbol Function
Using contact data
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text destination"
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 249. "Call"
If the message contains a number,
Reading the text message out loud the connection is established.
Read the text message out loud, refer to
page 249.

246
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Office Communication

Symbol Function Only a part of the email from the cell phone
is loaded into the vehicle.
"Select phone number"
If the message contains more than Reading the e-mail out loud
one number, select the desired num‐ Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 249.
ber from the list. The connection is
established.

"Further information" Calendar


Display additional information.
Display the calendar
Appointments during the last 20 days and the
E-mail next 50 days can be displayed.

Displaying e-mails 1. "Office"


1. "Office" 2. "Calendar"
2. "Messages" The appointments on the current day are
displayed.
3. Select the desired e-mail.

Selecting the calendar day


Displaying e-mail contacts
1. Select the date.
If the sender and recipient of an e-mail are trans‐
mitted by the mobile phone, this information is
displayed in the e-mail.
"Sender/Recipient"
If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con‐
tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con‐
tact to display details.
If the e-mail addresses are not stored in the con‐
tacts, only the e-mail address is displayed.

2. Select the desired day or date.


Using contact data
▷ "Next day"
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or ▷ "Date:"
selected, refer to page 249. ▷ "Previous day"
▷ "Today"
Deactivating the full display
When an e-mail is opened in the vehicle, the e- Display the appointment
mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle. This may 1. Select the desired appointment.
result in charges.
2. Scroll through the appointment if neces‐
1. "Office" sary:
2. "Messages" ▷ Turn the controller.
3. Open "Options". ▷ Select the symbol.
4. "Fully download e-mails"

247
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Communication Office

Using contact data Using contact data


Contact data from appointments, tasks, text Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 249. selected, refer to page 249.

Reading the appointment out loud Reading the task out loud
Read the appointment out loud, refer to Read the task out loud, refer to page 249.
page 249.

Notes
Tasks
Displaying notes
Displaying the task list 1. "Office"
Display tasks that are due within the next 2. "Notes"
90 days.
All notes are displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Tasks" Displaying the note
1. Select the desired note.
Sorting the task list
1. Select the header in the task list.

2. Scroll in the note if necessary:


▷ Turn the controller.
2. Select the sorting criterion: ▷ Select the symbol.
▷ "Priority (!)"
▷ "Subject" Using contact data
▷ "Due date" Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
Displaying the task selected, refer to page 249.
1. Select the desired task.
Reading the note out loud
2. Scroll in the task if necessary:
Read the note out loud, refer to page 249.
▷ Turn the controller.
▷ Select the symbol.

248
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Office Communication

Reminders Reading out loud


Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries,
Displaying reminders
tasks, and notes can be read out loud.
Reminders of pending appointments and tasks
are displayed. After an appointment or after a 1. Select the desired message, appointment,
task is due, the reminder is no longer displayed. task, or note.
2. Select the symbol.
1. "Office"
The following options are available during read‐
2. "Reminders"
ing:
3. Select the desired reminder.
▷ "Pause"
The corresponding appointment or the task are
Interrupt reading. Select again to restart
displayed.
reading.
▷ "Back to beginning"
Using contact data Start reading the message again from the
beginning.
At a glance ▷ Select the symbol.
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text Go back one paragraph.
messages, emails, and notes can be stored or
▷ Select the symbol.
selected.
Skip a paragraph.
Displaying contact or selecting phone ▷ To end reading, turn the controller to the left.
number
1. "Use contact data"
2. Display the contact or select the phone What to do if...
number: Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
▷ Select the contact to display contact de‐ page 230.
tails. Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, or
▷ Select the phone number to establish a e-mails from the mobile phone are not dis‐
connection directly. played.
▷ The mobile phone is not capable of the
Storing contact data missing function or is not connected cor‐
1. "Use contact data" rectly.
2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad‐ ▷ The Office function is deactivated.
dress. ▷ The mobile phone is connected as an addi‐
3. Open "Options". tional phone.
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new ▷ Appointments are older than 20 days or are
contact" more than 50 days in the future.
▷ The tasks have been marked as completed
or have a due date that lies more than
90 days in the future.

249
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Communication Office

▷ Depending on the number of stored ap‐


pointments, task notes, and messages in
the mobile phone, not all are displayed in the
vehicle.
Not all appointments and tasks from the mobile
phone are displayed at the right time?
▷ The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly set
on the Control Display and mobile phone.
The e-mail attachment is not displayed.
▷ E-mails are transmitted without an attach‐
ment.
Entries are not displayed in full length.
▷ Text were already transmitted from the mo‐
bile phone in a shortened form.
▷ Synchronization between the mobile phone
and vehicle may take several minutes.
The contact pictures are not being displayed?
▷ Up to 200 contact pictures can be stored in
the vehicle.
The E-mail is displayed with a delay?
▷ Check the e-mail settings on the telephone
and adjust if necessary.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, please
contact the hotline or service center.

250
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Contacts Communication

Contacts
Vehicle equipment 4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next
to the entry field.
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.

Note 5. Enter the text, refer to page 23.

Equipment version without the mobile phone In vehicles equipped with a navigation sys‐
preparation package. tem: it is only possible to enter addresses
that are contained in the vehicle navigation
data. This ensures that destination guid‐
ance is possible for all addresses.
General information
6. If necessary, "Store".
Contacts can be created and edited and the ad‐
7. "Store contact in vehicle"
dresses can be adopted as destinations for nav‐
igation.
Specifying the home address
A home address can be stored. It appears at the
New contact top of the contact list.
1. "Home"
1. "Contacts"
2. Create a contact.
2. "New contact"
3. "Store contact in vehicle"

My contacts
General information
List of all contacts stored in the vehicle.

Displaying contacts
1. "Contacts"
3. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐
ous entries: "Delete input fields"

251
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Communication Contacts

2. "My contacts" 2. Select the address.


3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"

Checking the address as a destination


An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con‐
tained in the vehicle. The address can be
checked for this purpose.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De‐ address.
pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
2. Open "Options".
search is offered, refer to page 23.
3. "Check as destination"
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts: 4. Correct and store the address if necessary.

Symbol Storage location Selecting the sorting order of the


No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not names
been checked as a destination. Names can be displayed in a different order.

In the vehicle; the address has 1. "My contacts"


been checked as a destination. 2. Open "Options".
3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
Editing a contact last name"
1. Select the desired contact.
Deleting contacts
2. "Edit contact"
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"

3. Change the entries.


4. Move the controller to the left.
5. "Yes"

Selecting the contact as a navigation


destination
1. Select the desired contact.

252
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
ConnectedDrive Communication

ConnectedDrive
Vehicle equipment ▷ BMW Assist is activated.

This chapter describes all series equipment as Services offered


well as country-specific and special equipment
▷ Emergency Request: when you press the
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
SOS button, a connection to the BMW As‐
describes equipment that may not be found in
sist Response Center is established. The
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
BMW Assist Response Center then speaks
special equipment or the country version. This
with you and takes further steps to help you.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. ▷ Automatic Collision Notification: under cer‐
tain conditions, a connection is established
to the BMW Assist Response Center after a
serious accident. If possible, the BMW As‐
BMW Assist
sist Response Center then speaks with you
and takes further steps to help you.
General information
BMW Assist provides you with certain services, ▷ Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW
e.g., transmission of the position data of your Roadside Assistance can be contacted if as‐
vehicle to the BMW Assist Response Center if sistance is needed in the event of a break‐
an Emergency Request has been initiated. down. If possible, the vehicle and position
data are transmitted in the process.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi‐
vidually agreed upon contract. ▷ Customer Relations: connection with Cus‐
tomer Relations for information on all as‐
After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist pects of your vehicle.
system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist
Response Center without your having to visit a ▷ TeleService: data on your vehicle's service
service center. After the BMW Assist system status or required inspections are transmit‐
has been deactivated, no BMW Assist services ted to your service center, either automati‐
will be available. The BMW Assist system can be cally before a service due date or when you
reactivated by a service center after you sign a request a BMW service appointment.
new contract. ▷ Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Re‐
sponse Center provides assistance if, for ex‐
Requirements ample, the remote control is not available
▷ The installed BMW Assist system is logged and the vehicle needs to be opened.
in to a wireless communications network. ▷ Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report
This network must be capable of transmit‐ that your vehicle was stolen to the police, the
ting the services. BMW Assist Response Center can deter‐
▷ To transmit position data, the vehicle must mine its position.
be able to determine the current position. ▷ In addition to these services, the optional
▷ The BMW Assist service contract was Convenience Plan offers Concierge service
signed with your service center or with the and information for route planning, traffic,
BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling and weather. A limited number of calls can
must have been completed. be made via the BMW Assist Response
Center with Critical Calling if, for example,

253
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Communication ConnectedDrive

the mobile phone is not available or dis‐ Concierge service


charged.
Press the SOS button to contact the BMW General information
Assist Response Center. The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐
mation on events, gas stations, and hotels, and
provides phone numbers and addresses. Hotels
TeleService can be booked directly by the BMW Assist Con‐
cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
General information the optional Convenience Plan.
TeleService supports communication with your
service center. Starting the Concierge service
▷ Data on the vehicle's service requirements 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
can be sent directly to the service center. In 2. "Concierge"
this way, the service center can plan its work
in advance. This shortens the duration of the
service appointment.
▷ In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve‐
hicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance.
▷ The service varies by country.
▷ Connection costs may ensue.
▷ Services may be restricted abroad.
3. "Start service"
Requirements A voice connection is established with the BMW
▷ BMW Assist is activated. Assist Concierge service. Phone numbers and
addresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.
If BMW Assist is not activated, a mobile
phone that has been recommended by
BMW for TeleService and that is configured
for mobile data communication must be Messages
connected with the vehicle. Information on messages, refer to page 245.
▷ Wireless reception is available.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
Roadside Assistance
Using TeleService
The TeleServices are typically activated in the
At a glance
vehicle. BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
Even if the TeleServices are not active, a voice
down.
contact to Roadside Assistance is still possible.
Roadside Assistance can also be contacted via
To continue using or to deactivate the services,
a Check Control message, refer to page 83.
please contact your service partner or the BMW
customer hotline.

254
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
ConnectedDrive Communication

Starting Roadside Assistance without After the data are transmitted, the voice con‐
BMW Assist or TeleService nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab‐
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" lished.

2. "Roadside Assistance"
The Roadside Assistance number is dis‐ BMW Online
played. If the mobile phone is paired, a con‐
nection is established to Roadside Assis‐ At a glance
tance.
A business search can be opened via BMW On‐
line.
License conditions
This product contains NetFront Browser soft‐
ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark
of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun‐
tries.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Starting Roadside Assistance with Independent JPEG Group.
BMW Assist or TeleService
Requirements
General information ▷ Subscription to the optional Convenience
In vehicles equipped with TeleService, support Plan.
is first offered by TeleService Diagnosis and
▷ The date setting on the Control Display is
then, if necessary, by TeleService Help.
current.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" ▷ The vehicle is located within wireless net‐
2. "Roadside Assistance" work coverage.
3. "Start service"
Starting BMW Online
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Online"

TeleService Diagnosis
TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are 3. If necessary, "OK".
important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are The BMW Online home page is displayed.
transmitted automatically.

255
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Communication ConnectedDrive

Operating BMW Online Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or


To start a search: TeleService
▷ Turn the controller to highlight an element. 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
▷ Press the controller to display an element. 2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"
Opening the start page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Display start page" Service Request
At a glance
Sends information to your service partner to re‐
quest the arrangement of a service appoint‐
ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur‐
ing a Service Request. If possible, your service
partner will establish contact with you.

Starting a Service Request


1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
Loading a new page 2. "Service Request"
1. Open "Options". 3. "Start service"
2. "Reload"

Cancel
1. Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"

Customer Relations
At a glance A Service Request can be started via a Check
Control message, refer to page 83.
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.

Calling Customer Relations Automatic Service Request


The TeleService data necessary for servicing
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist the vehicle are automatically sent to your service
or TeleService partner prior to the service deadline. If possible,
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" the service partner will contact you and a service
appointment can be arranged.
2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis‐
played. If the mobile phone is paired, a connec‐
tion is established to Customer Relations.

256
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
ConnectedDrive Communication

To check when your service partner was noti‐ Data transfer


fied:
During the updating of BMW services, display
1. "Vehicle Info" the status of the data transfer.
2. "Vehicle status"
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Data transfer"

Apps
At a glance
Certain software applications of a suitable cell
3. Open "Options". phone can be integrated in the vehicle. These
software applications are displayed on the Con‐
4. "Last Service Request" trol Display.
They are operated via iDrive.
Services status Requirements
Displaying available services ▷ The mobile phone is suitable.
Display of all services available in the vehicle. ▷ The mobile phone operating system sup‐
ports the software applications of Apps.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
▷ Software applications are installed on the
2. "Service Status" cell phone and ready to use.
3. "Available services" ▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
Any additionally incurred costs are not a part
of Apps.
▷ Use only BMW approved software applica‐
tions; otherwise, it may result in malfunc‐
tions.
Information about suitable cell phones, available
software applications and their installation can
be found at www.bmw.com/connectivity or at
the service center.

Updating BMW Assist Create the entries.


Manual update of TeleService and BMW Assist. Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions allow. Otherwise, the vehicle occu‐
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" pants and other road users may be put in danger
2. "Service Status" because of the distraction from driving.
3. "Update BMW Assist" For reasons of safety, some software applica‐
tions are usable only while the vehicle is station‐
ary.◀

257
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Communication ConnectedDrive

Operating Apps ▷ Some mobile phones cannot simultane‐


1. Connect the cell phone via the snap-in ously use Apps and the Bluetooth hands-
adapter or via the USB audio interface. free system.

2. "ConnectedDrive" If necessary, restart the software application


on the cell phone after a phone conversa‐
3. Select the desired software application.
tion.

Displaying status
Information about the currently available soft‐
ware applications can be displayed.
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW apps"

PlugIn
Selected functions of the cell phone are dis‐
played on the Control Display. They can be op‐
erated via iDrive.

1. Connect cell phone via the snap-in adapter.


2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. "PlugIn"
4. "Activate PlugIn"
5. Navigate to the displayed functions via the
controller and select, for example, a desired
category or track.
Press button to switch within the cell
phone functions to a higher level or back.

Press button twice to switch back to the


main menu.

Notes
▷ The ranges of Apps that can be displayed on
the Control Display depend on the range of
installed software applications on the mo‐
bile phone.
▷ The data transmission of the software ap‐
plications from the cell phone to the vehicle
can last some time. Some software applica‐
tions depend on the speed of the available
Internet connection of the cell phone.

258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
ConnectedDrive Communication

259
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500


Mobility Refueling

Refueling
Vehicle equipment Fuel cap
This chapter describes all series equipment as
Opening
well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
describes equipment that may not be found in flap.
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.

General information
Refuel promptly
At the latest, refuel at a range of
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function
is not ensured and damage may occur.◀ 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
For Diesel engines
Closing
The filler neck is designed for refueling at diesel
1. Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until you
fuel pumps.
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Notes Do not pinch the retaining strap
Switch off the engine before refueling Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
Always switch off the engine before refu‐ to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to the properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀
tank and a message will be displayed.◀ A message is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.
Observe when handling fuel
▷ Take all precautionary measures and Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
observe all applicable regulations
In the event of a malfunction, the fuel filler flap
when handling fuel.
can be released manually:
▷ Do not carry any spare fuel containers in
your vehicle. They can develop a leak and 1. Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo
cause an explosion or cause a fire in the area.
event of an accident.◀

262
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Refueling Mobility

2. Pull the knob with the gas pump symbol.

Observe the following when


refueling
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com‐
pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel
pump nozzle during refueling causes:
▷ Premature pump shutoff.
▷ Reduced efficiency in the fuel-vapor recov‐
ery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise, es‐
caping fuel may harm the environment or dam‐
age the vehicle.◀

Handling fuels
Follow the safety instructions provided at
gas stations; otherwise, there is a danger of per‐
sonal injury and property damage.◀

Fuel tank capacity


Approx. 22.5 US gallons/85 liters, including the
reserve capacity of approx. 2.1 US gallons/8 li‐
ters.
X5 xDrive50i/X6 xDrive50i: reserve capacity of
approx. 3.2 gallons/12 liters.

263
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Fuel

Fuel
Vehicle equipment The engine is knock controlled. Therefore, you
can refuel with different gasoline qualities.
This chapter describes all series equipment as
well as country-specific and special equipment Recommended fuel quality
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
BMW recommends AKI 91.
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
Minimum fuel grade
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ BMW recommends AKI 89.
tems. Minimum fuel grade
Do not fill up with fuel below the specified
minimum quality; otherwise, the engine may not
Fuel quality run properly.◀

Gasoline If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐


For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Do not use fuels that are labeled at the fuel pump
as containing metals. Minimum fuel grade

Only refuel with lead-free gasoline without The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
metal additives harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and
Do not refuel with leaded gasoline or gasoline stalling, especially under certain environmental
with metal additives, e. g., manganese or iron; conditions such as high ambient temperature
otherwise, the catalytic converter and other and high altitude, may occur.
components will be permanently damaged.◀
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %, ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
i.e., E10, may be used for refueling. brand and a higher octane grade — AKI number
The ethanol should fulfill the following quality — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine
standards: deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase
gasoline from BP or Top Tier retailers.
US: ASTM 4806–xx
Failure to comply with these recommendations
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
xx: always adhere to the currently applicable nance.◀
standard.
Do not refuel with ethanol E85 Diesel
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel
would damage the engine and fuel supply sys‐ The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel
tem.◀ with a low sulfur content:
Ultra-low sulfur diesel ASTM D 975-xx.

264
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Fuel Mobility

xx: always adhere to the currently applicable BMW X5 with BMW Advanced
standard.
Diesel
Only refuel with ultra-low sulfur diesel.
The percentage of biodiesel in the fuel The concept
must not exceed 5%, referred to as B5. Do not BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen oxides
refuel with gasoline. If the vehicle has been re‐ in the diesel exhaust of your vehicle by injecting
fueled with incorrect fuel such as gasoline, do the reducing agent diesel exhaust fluid into the
not start the engine; otherwise, there is a danger exhaust line. In the catalytic converter, a chem‐
of engine damage.◀ ical reaction occurs that minimizes nitrogen ox‐
ides.
If you added the wrong fuel, contact the service
center. In order to be able to start the engine in the usual
way, there must be a sufficient supply of diesel
If the nozzle cannot be inserted into the fuel filler
exhaust fluid in the separate reservoir.
pipe of your BMW, please check to make sure
that you are refueling with a diesel fuel pump and
System heating
whether this is equipped with a diesel nozzle.
In order to bring the system to operating tem‐
In the event the Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuel can‐
perature after a cold start of the engine, the au‐
not be fully inserted into the fuel filler neck,
tomatic transmission shifts into the next higher
please contact BMW Roadside Assistance for
gear at a later point.
instructions on how to add fuel. For more infor‐
mation on BMW Roadside Assistance, refer to
Reserve display
page 301.
A display in the instrument panel informs you
Winter diesel about the remaining distance can be covered
with the amount of fuel currently in the tank.
To ensure that the diesel engine remains op‐
erational in the winter, use winter diesel.
It is available at gas stations during winter
months.
The standard fuel filter heating prevents the
supply of fuel from stalling during driving.
Do not use diesel additives
Do not use additives, including gasoline;
otherwise, engine damage may occur.◀
The reserve display appears approx.
1,000 miles/1,600 km before the tank is empty.

As soon as the reserve display has appeared in


the instrument panel, have the diesel exhaust
fluid refilled to prevent the engine from being
unable to restart.

265
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Fuel

Diesel exhaust fluid at minimum Diesel exhaust fluid at low


temperatures
Due to its physical properties, it may be neces‐
sary to replenish the level of diesel exhaust fluid
at temperatures below +23 ℉/ -5 ℃, even be‐
tween the regular maintenance dates.
If the fluid needs to be refilled, this will be indi‐
cated with the reserve display in the instrument
cluster, refer to page 265.

Even with a display of -- mls, the engine will con‐ Only refill the diesel exhaust fluid
tinue to run, provided that it is not switched off, yourself in exceptional circumstances
and all other operating requirements are met, To be able to reach the nearest service center
e.g. sufficient fuel. with your vehicle, you may refill the diesel ex‐
haust fluid yourself, making sure to heed the
No engine start warning notices specified below.
Do not drive until the displayed remaining Handling diesel exhaust fluid
distance runs out. Otherwise, it may not be pos‐
Do not allow diesel exhaust fluid to come
sible to restart the engine.◀
into contact with you. This can lead to skin and
eye irritation. Wear protective goggles and
Incorrect fueling gloves as needed. Follow the safety instructions
The warning lamp lights up: on the bottle. When opening the bottle or res‐
ervoir, pungent smelling vapors can escape. Be‐
The reservoir has been filled with an in‐
fore refilling, close the vehicle completely so
correct fluid.
that the vapors do not get into the interior of the
Please contact your service center. vehicle. When handling diesel exhaust fluid in
enclosed spaces, make sure to have sufficient
Have diesel exhaust fluid refilled ventilation. After handling diesel exhaust fluid,
wash hands thoroughly. Failure to do so may
This exhaust fluid is refilled by your service cen‐
lead to irritation, for instance, due to inadvertent
ter during regular maintenance. If you adhere to
contact with the eyes. If eye irritation occurs,
this maintenance schedule, it is usually not nec‐
immediately rinse eyes with ample water and
essary to refill any fluids between the mainte‐
contact a doctor if necessary. If diesel exhaust
nance dates.
fluid comes into contact with surfaces of your
Under certain circumstances, for example, due vehicle, rinse the affected surfaces with water or
to a particularly sporty driving style or operation else damage may occur. Keep diesel exhaust
of the vehicle at high altitudes, it may be neces‐ fluid out of reach of children.◀
sary to refill fluids between maintenance dates.
As soon as the reserve display has appeared in Suitable diesel exhaust fluid
the instrument panel, have the diesel exhaust
▷ Preferred: BMW Diesel Exhaust Fluid. This
fluid refilled to prevent the engine from being
bottle and its special adapter permit con‐
unable to restart.
venient refilling with diesel exhaust fluid.
You can have the fluid refilled by a service cen‐
▷ Alternative: NOx reduction agent AUS 32
ter.

266
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Fuel Mobility

Diesel exhaust fluid can be obtained from your The reservoir of the vehicle is filled.
service center.

Refilling quantity
Refilling quantity at the start of the reserve dis‐
play:
Approx. 0.75 gallons/2.7 liters

Open reservoir for diesel exhaust fluid


1. Open the hood, refer to page 282.
2. Fit the releasing tool from the tool kit, refer 3. The reservoir is full when the fill level in the
to page 288, into place and open the lock, bottle stops changing. It is not possible to
see arrow. overfill.
Pull bottle back, refer to arrow, and unscrew
it.

Refilling BMW diesel exhaust fluid


1. Set bottle into place and rotate until it comes
into contact with the stop, refer to arrow. Closing reservoir
After the reservoir is filled, close it again with the
releasing tool.

After refilling diesel exhaust fluid

Incorrect fluid
Incorrect fluids
After refilling with the incorrect fluid, e.g.,
antifreeze for windshield wiper fluid, do not start
2. Press bottle down, refer to arrow. the engine because this could result in a fire
hazard.◀

Contact your service center.

Bottle disposal
Diesel exhaust fluid bottles can be dis‐
posed of by your service center.

267
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Fuel

Only dispose of empty bottles in your household


garbage if the local legal regulations permit it.

Reserve display

After refilling, the reserve continues to appear


after the engine is restarted. After the vehicle
has been driven for a few more minutes, this
display will disappear.

268
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Wheels and tires Mobility

Wheels and tires


Vehicle equipment Do not drive with depressurized or flat tires, ex‐
cept for run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously im‐
This chapter describes all series equipment as pair your vehicle's handling and braking re‐
well as country-specific and special equipment sponse. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also to a loss of control over the vehicle.◀
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected After adjusting the tire inflation pressure, reset
special equipment or the country version. This the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 97, or
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
tems. page 95.

Pressure specifications
Tire inflation pressure The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
Safety information temperature.
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving approved and tire brands recommended by
safety that depend on the condition of the tires BMW; a list of these is available from your serv‐
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres‐ ice center.
sure. For correct identification of the right tire inflation
pressures, observe the following:
Checking the pressure ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
▷ Maximum allowable driving speed.
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires
100 mph or 160 km/h
are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h, ad‐
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly just pressures to the respective tire inflation
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly pressures listed on the following pages in the
and correct it if necessary, even in the compact column for traveling speeds up to 100 mph/
wheel: usually twice monthly or before embark‐ 160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.
ing on a long trip. If you fail to observe this pre‐ These tire inflation pressures can also be found
caution, you may be driving on tires with incor‐ on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's
rect tire pressures, a condition that may not only door is open.
compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but
also lead to tire damage and the risk of an acci‐
dent.

269
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressures for driving


above 100 mph or 160 km/h
Adjust the tire inflation pressures
To drive at maximum speeds in excess of
100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the re‐
spective tire inflation pressures listed on the fol‐
lowing pages in the column for traveling speeds
including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/
h. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could
Do not exceed the maximum permissible occur.◀
speed
Observe all national and local maximum speed
The maximum permissible speed for these tire
limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could oc‐
pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h Do not exceed
cur.
this speed; otherwise, tire damage and acci‐
dents could occur.◀

Tire inflation pressures X5 xDrive35i/X5 xDrive35d with two rows of seats

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to Traveling speeds including


100 mph/160 km/h those exceeding 100 mph/
160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table


are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature

Compact wheel: Speeds of up to 50 mph/80 km/h


T 155/90 D 18 113 M 4.2/60
T 155/80 R 19 114 M

Without Sport Package:

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL A/S RSC 2.2/32 2.5/36 2.4/35 2.8/41


255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.4/35 2.9/42


255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL RSC 2.2/32 - 2.4/35 -


Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL RSC - 2.4/35 - 2.6/38

270
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Wheels and tires Mobility

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.4/35 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 2.4/35 - 2.6/38

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.5/36 -


Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC - 2.6/38 - 2.8/41

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.4/35 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC - 2.4/35 - 2.7/39

With Sport Package:

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 2.2/32 2.5/36 2.4/35 2.8/41

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.4/35 2.9/42

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL RSC 2.2/32 - 2.7/39 -


Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL RSC - 2.4/35 - 2.9/42

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.6/38 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 2.4/35 - 2.8/41

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.6/38 -


Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC - 2.6/38 - 3.1/45

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.7/39 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC - 2.4/35 - 3.0/44

Tire inflation pressures X5 xDrive50i with two rows of seats

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to Traveling speeds including


100 mph/160 km/h those exceeding 100 mph/
160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table


are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature

Compact wheel: Speeds of up to 50 mph/80 km/h


T 155/90 D 18 113 M 4.2/60
T 155/80 R 19 114 M

Without Sport Package:

271
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL A/S RSC 2.2/32 2.5/36 2.4/35 2.8/41


255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC 2.2/32 2.7/39 2.5/36 3.0/44


255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 W XL RSC 2.2/32 - 2.5/36 -


Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 W XL RSC - 2.4/35 - 2.6/38

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.4/35 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 2.5/36 - 2.7/39

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.5/36 -


Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 Y XL RSC - 2.7/39 - 2.8/41

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.4/35 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC - 2.5/36 - 2.7/39

With Sport Package:

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 2.2/32 2.5/36 2.4/35 2.8/41

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 2.2/32 2.7/39 2.5/36 3.0/44

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 W XL RSC 2.2/32 - 2.8/41 -


Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 W XL RSC - 2.4/35 - 3.1/45

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.9/42 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 2.5/36 - 3.2/46

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.6/38 -


Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 Y XL RSC - 2.7/39 - 3.1/45

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.9/42 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC - 2.5/36 - 3.2/46

272
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Wheels and tires Mobility

Tire inflation pressures X5 xDrive35i/X5 xDrive35d with three rows of seats

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to Traveling speeds including


100 mph/160 km/h those exceeding 100 mph/
160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table


are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature

Without Sport Package:

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL A/S RSC 2.3/33 2.8/41 2.6/38 3.1/45


255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC 2.5/36 3.0/44 2.8/41 3.3/48


255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL RSC 2.2/32 - 2.4/35 -


Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL RSC - 2.6/38 - 2.9/42

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.4/35 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 2.7/39 - 2.9/42

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC 2.4/35 - 2.6/38 -


Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC - 2.9/42 - 3.1/45

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.4/35 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC - 2.7/39 - 2.9/42

With Sport Package:

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 2.3/33 2.8/41 2.6/38 3.1/45

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 2.5/36 3.0/44 2.8/41 3.3/48

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL RSC 2.2/32 - 2.8/41 -


Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL RSC - 2.6/38 - 3.3/48

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.8/41 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 2.7/39 - 3.3/48

273
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC 2.4/35 - 2.9/42 -


Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC - 2.9/42 - 3.4/49

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.8/41 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC - 2.7/39 - 3.3/48

Tire inflation pressures X5 xDrive50i with three rows of seats

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to Traveling speeds including


100 mph/160 km/h those exceeding 100 mph/
160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table


are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature

Without Sport Package:

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL A/S RSC 2.3/33 2.8/41 2.6/38 3.1/45


255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC 2.5/36 3.0/44 2.8/41 3.3/48


255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 W XL RSC 2.2/32 - 2.4/35 -


Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 W XL RSC - 2.6/38 - 2.9/42

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.4/35 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 2.7/39 - 2.9/42

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC 2.4/35 - 2.6/38 -


Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 Y XL RSC - 2.9/42 - 3.1/45

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.4/35 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC - 2.7/39 - 2.9/42

With Sport Package:

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 2.3/33 2.8/41 2.6/38 3.1/45

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 2.5/36 3.0/44 2.8/41 3.3/48

274
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Wheels and tires Mobility

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 W XL RSC 2.2/32 - 2.8/41 -


Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 W XL RSC - 2.6/38 - 3.3/48

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.9/42 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 2.7/39 - 3.4/49

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC 2.4/35 - 2.8/41 -


Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 Y XL RSC - 2.9/42 - 3.2/46

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC 2.3/33 - 2.9/42 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC - 2.7/39 - 3.4/49

Tire inflation pressure X6 xDrive35i

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to Traveling speeds including


100 mph/160 km/h those exceeding 100 mph/
160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table


are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC 2.2/32 2.4/35 2.5/36 3.0/44


255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC
255/50 R 19 107 V M+S XL RSC

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL RSC 2.2/32 - 2.5/36 -


Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL RSC - 2.2/32 - 2.6/38

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 2.2/32 - 2.5/36 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 2.2/32 - 2.5/36

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC 2.2/32 - 2.6/38 -


Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC - 2.3/33 - 2.7/39

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC 2.2/32 - 2.5/36 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC - 2.2/32 - 2.7/39

Compact wheel: Speeds of up to 50 mph/80 km/h


T 155/90 D 18 113 M 4.2/60
T 155/80 R 19 114 M

275
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressures for X6 xDrive50i

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to Traveling speeds including


100 mph/160 km/h those exceeding 100 mph/
160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table


are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC 2.3/33 2.5/36 2.8/41 3.0/44


255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC
255/50 R 19 107 V M+S XL RSC

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 W XL RSC 2.5/36 - 2.9/42 -


Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 W XL RSC - 2.5/36 - 2.9/42

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 2.5/36 - 3.0/44 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC - 2.5/36 - 3.0/44

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC 2.5/36 - 3.1/45 -


Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC - 2.5/36 - 3.1/45

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC 2.5/36 - 3.0/44 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC - 2.5/36 - 3.0/44

Compact wheel: Speeds of up to 50 mph/80 km/h


T 155/90 D 18 113 M 4.2/60
T 155/80 R 19 114 M

Tire identification marks 107: load rating, not for ZR tires


V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
Speed letter
tires.
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
Tire size T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
Example: 255/55 R 19 107 V H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
255: nominal width in mm V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
55: aspect ratio in % W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
R: radial tire code Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
19: rim diameter in inches

276
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Wheels and tires Mobility

Tire Identification Number graded 100. The relative performance of tires


Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
U.S. Department of Transportation. however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
DOT code:
practices and differences in road characteristics
DOT xxxx xxx 1012 and climate.
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design Traction
1012: tire age The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Tire age Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
The tire manufacturing date is contained in the on wet pavement as measured under controlled
tire identification mark: DOT ... 1012 means that conditions on specified government test surfa‐
the tire was manufactured in the week 10 of ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
2012. have poor traction performance.

BMW recommends that you replace all tires af‐ The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
ter 6 years at most, even if some tires may last on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
for 10 years. does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
planing, or peak traction characteristics.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Temperature
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
maximum section width. For example: and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
Treadwear 200 Traction AA heat when tested under controlled conditions
Temperature A on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐
tained high temperature can cause the material
DOT Quality Grades of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
Treadwear excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
Traction AA A B C
performance which all passenger car tires must
Temperature A B C meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Conform to Federal Safety Requirements Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
All passenger car tires must conform to
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.◀ Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
Treadwear tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ combination, can cause heat buildup and pos‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded sible tire failure.◀
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times
as well on the government course as a tire

277
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Wheels and tires

RSC – Run-flat tires Tire damage


The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to General information
page 280. Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐
jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires. Notes
These have better winter properties than Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as
summer tires. well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
XL pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
Designation for specially reinforced tires. low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐
Tire tread file tires.
Summer tires Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
fects:
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm. ▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm. to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by driving over curbs,
Winter tires road damage and similar situations.
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than In case of tire damage
0.16 in/4 mm.
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are duce your speed immediately and have the
less suitable for winter operation. wheels and tires checked right away; otherwise,
there is the increased risk of an accident.
Minimum tread depth
Drive carefully to the next service center or tire
shop.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.
Otherwise, tire damage can present a life-
threatening hazard to vehicle occupants and
other road users.◀

Repair of tire damage


For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
circumference and have the legally required placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. sult.◀
They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI,
Tread Wear Indicator.

278
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Wheels and tires Mobility

Changing wheels and tires Tire Pressure Monitor will not be able to detect
a flat tire, refer to page 97. Your service center
Mounting will be glad to advise you.

Information on mounting tires Recommended tire brands


Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center or tire specialist.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀

Wheel and tire combination


Information on the right wheel and tire combi‐
nation and rim version for your vehicle can be
obtained from the service center. For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
function of a variety of systems such as ABS or can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
DSC. With proper use, these tires meet the highest
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐ standards for safety and handling.
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer. Retreaded tires
Following tire damage, have the original wheel The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle ommend the use of retreaded tires.
as soon as possible.
Retreaded tires
Approved wheels and tires
Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐ sign and age of the tire casing structures can
mends that you use only wheels and tires that limit service life and have a negative impact on
have been approved for your particular vehicle road safety.◀
model.
For example, despite having the same official Winter tires
size ratings, variations can lead to body contact
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu‐ below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.
ate non-approved wheels and tires to determine
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐
if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
are mounted.◀
ance as winter tires.

Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire Maximum speed of winter tires
Pressure Monitor
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
When mounting new tires or changing from than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use then display a corresponding sign in the field of
wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the

279
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Wheels and tires

vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire spe‐ The wheels are composed of special rims and
cialist or from your service center. tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐
gree.
Maximum speed for winter tires
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
Do not exceed the maximum speed for the
main drivable to a restricted degree in the event
winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and acci‐
of a pressure loss.
dents can occur.◀
Driving with a damaged tire:
Run-flat tires ▷ Flat Tire Monitor FTM, refer to page 95
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. Your ▷ Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to
service center will be glad to advise you. page 97

Rotating wheels between axles


The manufacturer of your vehicle advises Snow chains
against swapping wheels between the front and
rear axles. Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
This can impair the handling characteristics.
recommended. Consult your service center for
Rotating the tires is not permissible when using more information.
different types of tires.
BMW X5: use only in pairs on the rear wheels,
equipped with tires of the following size:
Storage
▷ 255/55 R 18
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. ▷ 255/50 R 19

Always protect tires against all contact with oil, BMW X6: use only in pairs on rear wheels of size
grease and fuels. 255/50 R 19.

Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow
Run-flat tires chains are mounted; otherwise, the instrument
might issue an incorrect reading.
Label When driving with snow chains, it can be bene‐
ficial to temporarily activate DTC, refer to
page 104.

RSC label on the tire sidewall.

280
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Engine compartment Mobility

Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
This chapter describes all series equipment as special equipment or the country version. This
well as country-specific and special equipment also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also tems.

Important features in the engine compartment


BMW X5

1 Filler neck for washer fluid for the headlamp 3 Coolant expansion tank  285
and window washer system  72 4 Engine oil filler neck  284
2 Starting aid terminal  302

281
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Engine compartment

BMW X6

1 Filler neck for the washer fluid for the head‐ 3 Starting aid terminal  302
lamp and window washer system  73 4 Coolant expansion tank  285
2 Engine oil filler neck  284

Hood If this work is not carried out properly, there is


the danger of subsequent damage and related
Opening the hood safety hazards.◀

Working in the engine compartment 1. Pull the lever.


Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.

282
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Engine compartment Mobility

2. Press the release handle and open the hood. Checking the engine oil level
Your car is equipped with an electronic engine
oil level check.

Requirements
▷ The engine must be running and warm after
the vehicle has been driven for at least
6.2 miles/10 km.
▷ The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a
level roadway.

Closing the hood Displaying the oil level


1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"

Drop the hood from a height of ap‐


prox. 16 in/40 cm. It must be clearly heard to en‐
gage.
3. "Engine oil level"
Hood open when driving
If you see any signs that the hood is not Possible messages
completely closed while driving, pull over imme‐ ▷ "Engine oil level OK"
diately and close it securely.◀
▷ "Measurement not possible at this time."
Danger of pinching ▷ "Measuring engine oil level..."
Make sure that the closing path of the Duration with the engine running: ap‐
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ prox. 3 minutes.
Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes.
If engine oil was added, it may take up to
Engine oil 30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading.
▷ "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
General information
quart!"
Engine oil consumption depends on the driving
Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter
style and the conditions of use. A highly sporty
of engine oil at the next opportunity, refer
driving style, for example, results in considerably
also to Adding engine oil below.
higher engine oil consumption.
▷ "Engine oil level too high! Have this
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
checked."
after refueling.

283
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Engine compartment

Too much engine oil Too much engine oil


Have the vehicle checked immedi‐ Have the vehicle checked immediately;
ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en‐ otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐
gine damage.◀ age.◀

▷ "Measurement inactive. Have this Protect children


checked." Do not add engine oil. It is possi‐
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
ble to continue driving. Note the newly cal‐
dren and heed the warnings on the containers
culated remaining mileage until the next oil
to prevent health risks.◀
service, refer to page 81. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Oil types for refilling
Adding engine oil
Notes
Filler neck No oil additives
Do not use oil additives as these may
BMW X5
cause engine damage.◀

Viscosity classes of engine oils


When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
the engine oil belongs to one of the SAE viscos‐
ity classes 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40, or 5W-30, or
malfunctions or engine damage may occur.◀

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the


engine.
Due to national regulations, some oil types are
BMW X6 not available in every country.

Approved oil types

Gasoline engine

BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30

BMW Longlife-01

BMW Longlife-01 FE

Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter of Diesel engine


oil only after the corresponding message ap‐
pears on the Control Display. BMW Longlife-04

Add oil promptly


Further information on approved oil types can be
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;
obtained from the service center.
otherwise, engine damage could result.◀

284
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Engine compartment Mobility

Alternative oil types Checking the coolant level


If the approved engine oils are not available, up 1. Do not open the hood until the engine has
to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following cooled down.
specification can be used: 2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock‐
Gasoline engine wise slightly to allow any accumulated pres‐
sure to escape; then continue turning to
API SM or a higher quality standard open.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
Diesel engine the maximum and minimum marks in the
filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to
API ILSAC GF-5 the filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
Oil change the specified level; do not overfill.
An oil change should be carried out by the serv‐ 5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
ice center only. 6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.

Disposal
Comply with the appropriate environmen‐
tal protection regulations when disposing
of coolant additives.

Coolant
General information
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while the
engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may
cause burns.◀

Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise, en‐
gine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀

Coolant consists of water and additives.


Not all commercially available additives are suit‐
able for your vehicle. Ask your service center for
suitable additives.

285
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Maintenance

Maintenance
Vehicle equipment On the Control Display, the remaining distances
and times for selected maintenance require‐
This chapter describes all series equipment as ments and any legally required deadlines can be
well as country-specific and special equipment displayed individually, refer to page 81.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in Service data in the remote control
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
Information on the required maintenance is con‐
special equipment or the country version. This
tinuously stored in the remote control. Your
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
service center will read out this data and suggest
tems.
the right array of service procedures for your ve‐
hicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
BMW Maintenance System
mote control that you used most recently.
Setting the correct date
Make sure the date is set correctly, refer
to page 85; otherwise, the effectiveness of CBS
Condition Based Service is not ensured.◀

Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
The maintenance system provides information count.
on required maintenance measures and thus If this occurs, have a service center update the
provides support in maintaining road safety and time-dependent maintenance procedures,
the operational reliability of the vehicle. such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/acti‐
vated-charcoal filter.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ Service and Warranty
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐
Information Booklet for US
mines the maintenance requirements. models and Warranty and
The system makes it possible to adapt the Service Guide Booklet for
amount of maintenance you need to your user Canadian models
profile.
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
Details on the service requirements, refer to mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
page 81, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
play. additional information on service requirements.

286
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Maintenance Mobility

Maintenance and repair should be performed by Fuel cap


your service center. Make sure to have regular
The indicator lamp lights up.
maintenance procedures recorded in the vehi‐
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet If the fuel cap is not properly tightened,
for US models, and in the Warranty and Service the OBD system may conclude that
Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These en‐ fuel vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tight‐
tries are proof of regular maintenance. ened, the display should go out in a short time.

Socket for OBD Onboard Data memory


Diagnosis Your vehicle records data relating to vehicle op‐
eration, faults and user settings. These data are
stored in the remote control and can be read out
with suitable devices, particularly when the ve‐
hicle is serviced. The data obtained in this way
provide valuable information for service proc‐
esses and repair or for optimizing and develop‐
ing vehicle functions further. In addition, if you
signed a service contract for Assist, certain ve‐
hicle data can be sent directly from the vehicle
On the driver's side is an OBD socket for check‐ to facilitate the desired services.
ing the primary components in the vehicle emis‐
sions.

Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐
ous engine misfiring within a brief period can
seriously damage emission control compo‐
nents, in particular the catalytic converter.

Display of the previously described mal‐


functions on Canadian models.

287
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Replacing components

Replacing components
Vehicle equipment Front

This chapter describes all series equipment as


well as country-specific and special equipment
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.

1. Fold up the wiper arm.


Tool kit 2. Press the release button on the wiper arm,
see arrow 1.
3. Pull off the wiper blade toward the front, see
arrow 2.

BMW X5: rear

The tool kit is stowed under the cargo floor panel


in the cargo area.

Wiper blade replacement


1. Lift off the wiper arm completely and pull off
Do not fold down the wipers without wiper the wiper blade, refer to arrow.
blades
2. Mount the new wiper blade and press on
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have until it is heard to engage.
not been installed; this may damage the wind‐
shield.◀
Lamp and bulb replacement
Notes

Lamps and bulbs


Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety.

288
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Replacing components Mobility

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends Light-emitting diodes LED


that you entrust corresponding procedures to Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu‐
the service center if you are unfamiliar with them cent lenses serve as the light source for many of
or they are not described here. the controls, displays and other equipment in
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs your vehicle.
at the service center. These light-emitting diodes, which operate us‐
Danger of burns ing a concept similar to that applied in conven‐
tional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
light-emitting diodes.
otherwise, there is the danger of getting
burned.◀ Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never stare
Working on the lighting system
into the unfiltered light for several hours; other‐
When working on the lighting system, you wise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
should always switch off the lights affected to
prevent short circuits.
Headlamp glass
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
Condensation can form on the inside of the
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
headlamps in cool or humid weather. When you
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀
drive with the lights switched on, the conden‐
Do not perform work/bulb replacement on sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
xenon headlamps lamps do not need to be changed.
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐ If the condensation in the headlamps does not
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a evaporate after trips with the lights switched on,
service center. and the amount of moisture in the headlamps
increases, for example if water droplets form,
Due to the high voltage present in the system,
have them checked by your service center.
there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car‐
ried out improperly.◀

Wear protective goggles and gloves BMW X5: bulb replacement


Halogen bulbs are pressurized. Therefore,
wear protective goggles and gloves. Otherwise, Xenon headlamps
there is a danger of injuries if the bulb is acci‐
dentally damaged during replacement.◀ Notes
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the like‐
Do not touch the bulbs lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with on and off frequently shortens their life.
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of If a xenon bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and continue the trip with great care. Comply
and reduce its service life. with local regulations.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or
Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
hold the bulb by its base.◀
xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
service center.

289
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Replacing components

Due to the high voltage present in the system, Tail lamps


there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car‐ ▷ Turn signal, brake lamp: 21-watt bulb,
ried out improperly.◀ P21W.
Follow the general instructions on lamps and ▷ Brake force display: 21-watt bulb, P21W.
bulbs, refer to page 288. ▷ Backup lamp: 16-watt bulb, W16W
▷ Tail lamp: LED technology.
Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps,
daytime running lights Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
These lamps are made using LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a Arrangement of tail lamps
malfunction.

Turn signals, front


Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 288.
The illustration shows the right side of the en‐
gine compartment.
24-watt bulb, PY24W

1. Rotate bulb holder to the left and remove it


along with the bulb. 1 Tail lamp
2 Brake force display
3 Brake lamp
4 Tail lamp/side marker lamp
5 Backup lamp
6 Turn signal

Turn signals, brake lamps and backup


lamps
2. Rotate the bulb to the right along with the Follow the general instructions on lamps and
socket and replace. bulbs, refer to page 288.
3. Install in the reverse order.

Side marker lamps, rear


Contact the service center for bulb replacement.

Fog lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 288.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.

290
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Replacing components Mobility

The bulbs are integrated in a single bulb holder. Brake Force Display
1. Open the side panel in the cargo area. Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 288.
2. Remove the first aid kit and warning triangle
if necessary. Fold up the insulation. 1. Carefully remove the cover in the tailgate
panel with a screwdriver.

3. Press the button, arrow 1, down, press the


catches, arrows 2, outward slightly, and re‐ 2. Push the catch on the bulb holder to the left,
move the bulb holder. arrow, and remove it.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the P21W bulb
while turning it to the left for removal and re‐
placement.
Remove the W16W bulb and replace.
5. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
6. Remount the side panel.

3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turn‐


ing it to the left for removal and replacement.
4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
5. Before installing the cap, unclip the cargo
area lamp.

291
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Replacing components

Then lay the cap on its upper side and close BMW X6: bulb replacement
it, refer to arrow.
Xenon headlamps

Notes
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the like‐
lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps
on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a xenon bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps
and continue the trip with great care. Comply
with local regulations.
6. Position the cargo area lamp and clip it in,
Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
refer to arrow.
xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
service center.
Due to the high voltage present in the system,
there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car‐
ried out improperly.◀

Follow the general instructions on lamps and


bulbs, refer to page 288.

License plate lamps Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps,


Follow the general instructions on lamps and daytime running lights
bulbs, refer to page 288. The illustration shows the left side of the engine
These lamps are made using LED technology. compartment.

Contact your service center in the event of a 35-watt bulb, H8


malfunction. 1. Turn the cover to the left and remove.

Center brake lamp


Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 288.
This lamp uses LED technology for operation.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.

2. Left side of vehicle: rotate the bulb holder to


the right, see arrow, and remove.

292
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Replacing components Mobility

Right side of vehicle: rotate the bulb holder ▷ Daytime running lights.
to the left and remove. ▷ Side marker lights.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.

Turn signals, front


Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 288.
The illustration shows the left side of the engine
compartment.
24-watt bulb, PY24W
3. Disconnect plug and replace bulb.
4. Install in the reverse order. 1. Rotate bulb holder to the left and remove it
along with the bulb.
Side marker lamps
The illustration shows the left side of the engine
compartment.
5-watt bulb, WY5W XLL
1. Rotate the bulb holder to the left and re‐
move.

2. Rotate the bulb to the right along with the


socket and replace.
3. Install in the reverse order.

Fog lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 288.
2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and re‐
Contact your service center in the event of a
place.
malfunction.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Tail lamps
LED headlamps
▷ Turn signal, backup lamp: 21-watt bulb,
Follow the general instructions on lamps and H21W.
bulbs, refer to page 288.
▷ Brake lamp, brake force display: 21-watt
With LED headlamps, the following lamps are bulb, P21W
designed with LED technology:
▷ Tail lamp: LED technology.
▷ Low beams/high beams
Contact your service center in the event of a
▷ Adaptive Light Control malfunction.
▷ Parking and roadside parking lamps

293
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Replacing components

Arrangement of tail lamps Turn signal


Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 288.
1. Open the side panel in the cargo area.
2. Remove the first aid kit and warning triangle
if necessary.
3. Remove bulb holder along with bulb and re‐
place.

1 Tail lamps
2 Brake force display
3 Brake lamp
4 Backup lamp
5 Turn signal

Brake lamps
4. Install in the reverse order.
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 288.
Backup lamp
1. Open the side panel in the cargo area. Follow the general instructions on lamps and
2. Remove the first aid kit and warning triangle bulbs, refer to page 288.
if necessary.
1. Open the side panel in the cargo area.
3. Rotate the relevant bulb socket to the left
2. Remove the first aid kit and warning triangle
and remove.
if necessary.
3. Remove bulb holder along with bulb and re‐
place.

4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turn‐


ing it to the left for removal and replacement.
5. Install in the reverse order.
4. Install in the reverse order.

294
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Replacing components Mobility

Brake force display Contact your service center in the event of a


Follow the general instructions on lamps and malfunction.
bulbs, refer to page 288.
1. Carefully remove the cover in the tailgate Changing wheels
panel with a screwdriver.
Notes
Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, refer
to page 280, as standard equipment.
They do not need to be replaced immediately in
the event of a puncture.
When mounting new tires or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat
tires for your own safety.
BMW X6: do not rotate the front wheels to the
2. Rotate the bulb socket to the left and re‐
rear or vice versa, as otherwise the handling
move.
characteristics will be negatively affected.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
accessories from your service center.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turn‐


ing it to the left for removal and replacement.
4. Insert the bulb socket in the tailgate and en‐
gage it.
5. Replace the cover. The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated in the positions shown.
License plate lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
Compact wheel
bulbs, refer to page 288.
These lamps are made using LED technology. Safety precautions in the event of a flat tire
or wheel change
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction. Park the vehicle as far as possible from passing
traffic and on solid ground. Switch on the hazard
Center brake lamp warning system.

Follow the general instructions on lamps and Set the parking brake and engage transmission
bulbs, refer to page 288. position P.

This lamp uses LED technology for operation.

295
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Replacing components

Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle Removing compact wheel
and ensure that they remain outside the imme‐ The compact wheel is located in the cargo area
diate area in a safe place, such as behind a under the floor panel.
guardrail.
If a warning triangle or portable hazard warning
lamp is required, set it up on the roadside at an
appropriate distance from the rear of the vehicle.
Comply with all safety guidelines and regula‐
tions.
Change the wheel only on a level, firm surface
which is not slippery. The vehicle or the jack
could slip to the side if you attempt to raise the
vehicle on a soft or slippery surface such as
1. Remove the tool mount.
snow, ice, tiles, etc.
2. Release the wing nut 1.
Position the jack on a firm support surface.
3. Remove the washer 2 laterally.
Do not use a wooden block or similar object as
a support base for the jack, as this would prevent 4. Remove the compact wheel.
it from extending to its full support height and
reduce its load-carrying capacity. Preparing wheel change
To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie under 1. Observe the safety precautions above.
the vehicle, and never start the engine while it is 2. Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
supported by the jack.◀
Jacking up vehicle
What you will need 1. Position the vehicle jack at the jacking point
To avoid rattling noises later on, note the posi‐ closest to the wheel so that the entire sur‐
tions of the tools before removing them, then face of the jack base rests on the ground
return them to their initial positions after com‐ perpendicularly beneath the jacking point.
pleting work. The vehicle jack is designed for
The tools are located in the mount under the changing wheels only.
floor panel flap. The vehicle jack is designed for changing
wheels only. Do not attempt to raise another
vehicle model with it or to raise any load of
any kind. To do so could cause accidents
and personal injury.◀

1 Vehicle jack
2 Vehicle jack crank
3 Lug bolts wrench

296
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Replacing components Mobility

2. Guide the jack head into the rectangular re‐ are a hidden safety risk. The tightening tor‐
cess of the jacking point when cranking up, que equals 101 lb ft/140 Nm.◀
refer to illustration detail.
2. Stow the defective wheel in the cargo area.
The defective wheel cannot be stored under
the floor panel flap due to its size.
3. Check and correct the tire inflation pressure
at the earliest opportunity.
4. Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 95, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 97.
5. Replace the damaged tire as soon as possi‐
3. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are ble and have the new wheel/tire balanced.
changing is raised from the ground.
Driving with compact wheel
Mounting a wheel Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the Drive conservatively and do not exceed a
wheel. speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Otherwise, changes
2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from in the driving characteristics could result, for ex‐
the mounting surfaces of the wheel and hub. ample reduced track stability on braking, ex‐
Also clean the lug bolts. tended braking distance, and altered self-steer‐
3. Position the new wheel or compact wheel. ing characteristics in the limit range. In
Secure the wheel by screwing at least two conjunction with winter tires, these characteris‐
lug bolts into opposite bolt holes. tics are more pronounced.◀

When you mount wheels other than Genuine Only mount one compact wheel
BMW light-alloy wheels, different lug bolts
Only one compact wheel may be
may also be required.
mounted. Restore the wheels and tires to their
4. Screw in the remaining lug bolts. Tighten all original size as quickly as possible. Failure to do
the bolts securely in a diagonal pattern. so is a safety risk.◀
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack from
beneath the vehicle.
Vehicle battery
After mounting
1. Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern. Maintenance
Checking that the lug bolts are tight The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐
trolyte will last for the life of the battery.
To ensure safety, always have the lug
bolts checked with a calibrated torque Your service center will be glad to advise you on
wrench as soon as possible to ensure that questions regarding the battery.
they are tightened to the specified torque.
Otherwise, incorrectly tightened lug bolts

297
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Replacing components

Battery replacement ▷ Active steering: the system automatically in‐


itializes for a short time as you drive. During
Use approved vehicle batteries
this time, the system is deactivated, refer to
Only use vehicle batteries that have been page 108.
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
▷ xDrive: the system automatically initializes
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
as you drive. During this time, indicator
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
lamps light up. If the lamps do not disappear
ble.◀
during the current trip, have the system
After a battery replacement, have the battery checked.
registered on the vehicle by your service center
to ensure that all comfort functions are fully Disposing of old batteries
available. Have old batteries disposed of by your
service center or bring them to a recy‐
Charging the battery cling center.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
Note
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
Do not connect the charger to the socket that it does not tip over during transport.
Do not connect the battery charger to the
socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as
this could damage the vehicle.◀ Fuses
Replacing fuses
Starting aid terminals
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
Only charge using the starting aid terminals, re‐ do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute
fer to page 302, in the engine compartment of another color or amperage rating; this could
while the engine is switched off. lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in
a fire in the vehicle.◀
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the positions
again, refer to page 56.
▷ Time: update, refer to page 85.
▷ Date: update, refer to page 85.
▷ Radio station: save again, refer to page 186.
▷ Navigation system: wait for the navigation
system to be operational.
▷ Glass sunroof/panoramic glass sunroof: it
may only be possible to raise the roof. Have
the system initialized by the service center.
▷ Digital compass: recalibrate, refer to
page 137.

298
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Replacing components Mobility

In interior In cargo area


The fuses are located in the front passenger
footwell on the underside of the instrument clus‐
ter.
1. Unscrew screws, refer to arrows, of footwell
trim panel.

Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo


area.

2. Lay the trim panel in the footwell.


3. Release the screw, arrow 1, and fold the fuse
carrier down, arrow 2.

4. Replace the fuse concerned.


5. Installation is carried out in the reverse order
of removal. Ensure correct and secure at‐
tachment of the footwell trim panel in the
process.

299
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Breakdown assistance

Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment Only press the SOS button in an emergency.

This chapter describes all series equipment as Emergency Request not guaranteed
well as country-specific and special equipment For technical reasons, the Emergency Re‐
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable
describes equipment that may not be found in conditions.◀
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This Service contract
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
▷ After your contract with BMW Assist has ex‐
tems.
pired, the BMW Assist system can be deac‐
tivated by the service center without you
having to visit a workshop.
Hazard warning flashers
After deactivation, an Emergency Request
is no longer possible.
▷ Under certain circumstances, the system
can be reactivated by a service center after
you sign a new contract.

Initiating an Emergency Request


1. Press the cover briefly to open it.

The button for the hazard warning system is lo‐


cated on the center console.

Emergency Request
Requirements
▷ Equipment version with full preparation 2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
package mobile phone. button lights up.
An Emergency Request can be made, even ▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
if no mobile phones are paired with the ve‐ was initiated.
hicle.
If the circumstances allow this, remain in the
▷ BMW Assist is activated. vehicle until the connection has been estab‐
▷ Radio readiness is switched on. lished.
▷ The BMW Assist system is logged in to a ▷ The LED flashes if the connection to the
wireless communications network sup‐ BMW Assist Response Center has been es‐
ported by BMW Assist. tablished.
▷ The Assist system is operable.

300
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Breakdown assistance Mobility

Once the BMW Assist Response Center has First aid kit
received your Emergency Request, the
BMW Assist Response Center contacts you The first aid kit is located in a storage compart‐
and takes further steps to help you. ment on the right side in the cargo area.
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Some of the articles contained in the first aid
Assist Response Center can take further pouch have a limited service life.
steps to help you under certain circumstan‐ Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐
ces. ularly and replace any items promptly.
For this purpose, data that are used to de‐
termine the necessary rescue measures,
such as the current position of the vehicle if Jump-starting
it can be established, are transmitted to the
BMW Assist Response Center. Notes
▷ If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
Response Center cannot be heard on the started using the battery of another vehicle and
hands-free system, the hands-free system two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
may be malfunctioning. However, the BMW fully insulated clamp handles.
Assist Response Center may still be able to To prevent personal injury or damage to both
hear you. vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Initiating an Emergency Request
Do not touch live parts
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐ To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
quest is automatically initiated immediately after always avoid all contact with electrical compo‐
a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notifica‐ nents while the engine is running.◀
tion is not affected by pressing the SOS button.
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
Roadside Assistance hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi‐
mately the same capacitance in Ah. This in‐
Service availability formation can be found on the battery.
Roadside Assistance can be reached around the 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
clock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐ cle.
tance there in the event of a vehicle breakdown. 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Roadside Assistance
Bodywork contact between vehicles
The Roadside Assistance, refer to page 254
phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a There must not be any contact between
connection to Roadside Assistance can be es‐ the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise there
tablished directly. is a danger of shorting.◀

Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located in the cargo area.

301
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Breakdown assistance

Starting aid terminals battery, or to the corresponding engine or


body ground of the vehicle providing assis‐
Connecting order
tance.
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
5. Attach the other end of the cable to the neg‐
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury
ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
from sparking.◀
sponding engine or body ground of the ve‐
hicle to be started.

Starting the engine


Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
If the vehicle being started has a diesel en‐
gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle
The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine
run for approx. 10 minutes.
compartment acts as the battery's positive ter‐
minal. Fold open the cover. To do so, pull the tab. 2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started
in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another
attempt in order to allow the discharged bat‐
tery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
negative terminal.
Tow-starting and towing
Connecting jumper cables Observe applicable laws and regulations
1. Fold open the cover of the BMW starting-aid Observe applicable laws and regulations
terminal. To do so, pull the tab. for tow-starting and towing.◀
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive No additional passengers
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
Do not transport any passengers other
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
than the driver in a vehicle that is being towed.◀
terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the other end of the cable to the pos‐
itive terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle
to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the

302
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Breakdown assistance Mobility

Transporting your vehicle ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐


pending on local regulations.
Note ▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. identify the vehicle being towed by placing
Therefore, contact a service center in the event a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
of a breakdown. dow.
Do not have the vehicle towed
Towing methods when towing other
Have your vehicle transported on a loading vehicles
platform only; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
Tow bar
Tow truck The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is attached offset.

Do not tow with only the front or rear axle Tow rope
raised When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that
Do not tow the BMW with just the front or rear the tow rope is taut.
axle raised; otherwise, the wheels could lock up To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on
and the transfer case could be damaged.◀ the vehicle components when towing, always
Do not lift the vehicle use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or Attaching the tow rope correctly
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
result.◀ ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is se‐
cured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Towing other vehicles
Tow fitting
General information The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
Light towing vehicle ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
Your vehicle must not be lighter than the front or rear of the BMW.
vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be It is stored with the tool kit under the cargo floor
possible to control vehicle response.◀ cover in the cargo area, refer to page 288.

Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly Tow fitting, information on use

Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
cause damage.◀

303
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Breakdown assistance

▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads Tow-starting


only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., Note
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Do not tow-start your vehicle.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the ve‐ Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
hicle can occur.◀ cannot be started by tow-starting.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
Screw thread edied.
Left/right cover in the bumper: press on the ar‐
row symbol on the cover.

BMW X5: front

BMW X6: front

Rear

304
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Care Mobility

Care
Vehicle equipment Washing in automatic car washes
Give preference to cloth car washes or those
This chapter describes all series equipment as
that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint
well as country-specific and special equipment
damage.
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
describes equipment that may not be found in
Notes
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This Note the following:
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ ▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
tems. damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width of
Car washes the vehicle.
▷ Deactivate rain sensor, refer to page 72, to
Notes prevent unintentional wiper action.
Steam jets or high-pressure washers ▷ BMW X5: deactivate the rear window wiper
When using steam jets or high-pressure and protect it from damage. Ask the car
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away wash operator about any necessary protec‐
and use a maximum temperature of tive measures.
140 ℉/60 ℃. ▷ Remove additional attachments, for in‐
Holding them too close or using excessively stance a spoiler or telephone antenna, if
high pressures or temperatures can cause dam‐ there is a risk that these may be damaged.
age or preliminary damage that may then lead to
Guide rails in car washes
long-term damage.
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
Follow the operating instructions for the high-
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
pressure washer.◀
could be damaged.◀
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-
pressure washers Before driving into a car wash
When using high-pressure washers, do not The vehicle is able to roll if the following steps
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, for Park are taken.
Distance Control or the backup camera, for in‐
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
stance, for extended periods of time and only
lock, even with Comfort Access.
from a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀
2. Engage transmission position N.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐
3. Release the parking brake.
ter.
4. Deactivating Automatic Hold, refer to
Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ve‐
page 69.
hicle.
5. Switch the engine off.
6. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.

305
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Care

Transmission position P will be engaged: Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
▷ Automatically after approx. 30 minutes. cles.

▷ When the remote control is removed from Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
the ignition lock. gerous and harmful to your health.◀

Mixed tires Vehicle paint


Note the vehicle width Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
Before driving into a car wash, make sure
areas with high air pollution or natural contami‐
that the vehicle width is not too large for the car
nants, such as tree resin or pollen, can have an
wash, as otherwise the vehicle and the car wash
impact on the vehicle paint. Tailor the frequency
could be damaged.◀
and extent of your car care to these influences.
Immediately remove aggressive substances,
Headlamps
such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, or bird drop‐
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or pings, to prevent damage to or discoloration of
caustic cleansers. the paintwork.
▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to
insects, with shampoo and wash off with Leather care
water. Remove dust from the leather often, using a
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an cloth or vacuum cleaner.
ice scraper. Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
After washing the vehicle wear and premature degradation of the leather
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes surface.
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can To guard against discoloration, such as from
be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can clothing, provide leather care roughly every two
occur. months.
Fully remove an residue from the windows; oth‐ Clean light-colored leather more frequently as
erwise, streaking may occur when the wind‐ dust and dirt are more noticeable.
shield wipers are activated, impairing your view
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
and causing wiper noise.
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.

Vehicle care Suitable care products are available from the


service center.
Car care products
Upholstery material care
BMW recommends using cleaning and care
products from BMW, since these have been Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
tested and approved. If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a
soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable
Car care and cleaning products
interior cleaner.
Follow the instructions on the container.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
windows. terial vigorously.

306
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Care Mobility

Damage from Velcro® fasteners ▷ Matte black spray-coated components.


Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other ▷ Painted parts in the interior.
articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀
Moisten the cloth lightly with water if necessary.
Do not soak the headliner.
Caring for special components
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
Light-alloy wheels or solvents
Use wheel cleaner, particularly during the winter Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
months. Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
alkaline or abrasive cleaners, or steam jets grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to
above 140 ℉/60 ℃; follow the manufacturer's surface damage.◀
instructions.
Safety belts
Chrome surfaces
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
Carefully clean components such as the radiator thus have a negative impact on safety.
grille or door handles with an ample supply of
water, possibly with shampoo added, particu‐ No chemical cleaning
larly when they have been exposed to road salt. Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the webbing.◀
Aluminum running boards
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
A rust film on the aluminum running boards can belts clipped into their buckles.
be removed with a special cleaning agent.
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts
until they are dry.
Rubber components
Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleans‐ Carpets and floor mats
ers.
No objects in the area around the pedals
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sil‐
icon-containing car care products in order to Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
avoid damage or reduced noise damping. objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
Fine wood parts impeded while driving

Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ Do not place additional floor mats over existing
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft mats or other objects.
cloth. Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
Plastic components Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
These include: again when they are returned after being re‐
▷ Imitation leather surfaces. moved, such as for cleaning.◀

▷ Headliner. Floor mats can be removed from the passenger


▷ Lamp lenses. compartment for cleaning.

▷ Instrument cluster cover. When returning the floor mats, secure them
again to prevent slipping.

307
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Mobility Care

If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a


microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To
prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
in the direction of travel only.

Sensors/cameras
To clean sensors or cameras, use a cloth mois‐
tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.

Displays/screens
Clean the displays with an anti-static microfiber
cloth.
Cleaning displays
Do not use chemical or household cleans‐
ers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
ces or electrical components.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
can result.◀

Long-term vehicle storage


Your service center can advise you on what to
consider when storing the vehicle for longer
than three months.

308
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Care Mobility

309
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice activation system, and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500


Reference Technical data

Technical data
Vehicle equipment describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
This chapter describes all series equipment as special equipment or the country version. This
well as country-specific and special equipment also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also tems.

Dimensions
BMW X5

1 Vehicle width, with exterior mirrors: 86.5 in‐ 3 Vehicle width, without exterior mirrors:
ches/2,197 mm 76.1 inches/1,933 mm
2 Vehicle height: 69.9 inches/1,776 mm 4 Wheelbase: 115.5 inches/2,933 mm

312
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Technical data Reference

5 Vehicle length: 191.2 inches/4,857 mm


6 Tailgate opening height: 83.6 inches/
2,124 mm

Smallest turning circle dia.: 42.0 ft/12.8 m With mixed tires the vehicle width may exceed
the specified dimension.

BMW X6

1 Vehicle width, with exterior mirrors: 86.4 in‐ 4 Wheelbase: 115.5 inches/2,933 mm
ches/2,195 mm 5 Vehicle length: 192.0 inches/4,877 mm
2 Vehicle height: 66.5 inches/1,690 mm 6 Tailgate opening height: 90.0 inches/
3 Vehicle width, without exterior mirrors: 2,287 mm
78.1 inches/1,983 mm

313
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Reference Technical data

Smallest turning circle dia.: 42.0 ft/12.8 m With mixed tires the vehicle width may exceed
Height with roof rack: 66.9 in/1,699 mm the specified dimension.

Weights

BMW X5 X5 xDrive35i X5 xDrive50i X5 xDrive35d

Approved gross vehicle lbs/kg 6,371/2,890 6,669/3,025 6,581/2,985


weight

without 3rd row seats lbs/kg 6,052/2,745 6,327/2,870 6,261/2,840

Load lbs/kg 1,290/585 1,290/585 1,290/585

without 3rd row seats lbs/kg 1,102/500 1,102/500 1,102/500

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,800/1,270 3,020/1,370 2,976/1,350

without 3rd row seats lbs/kg 2,800/1,270 3,020/1,370 2,976/1,350

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,792/1,720 3,858/1,750 3,858/1,750

without 3rd row seats lbs/kg 3,439/1,560 3,549/1,610 3,483/1,580

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100 220/100 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/li‐ 35.8-75.2/620-1, 35.8-75.2/620‐ 35.8-75.2/620-1,


ter 750 1,750 750

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or


the gross vehicle weight.
BMW X6 X6 xDrive35i X6 xDrive50i

Approved gross vehicle lbs/kg 6,008/2,725 6,250/2,835


weight

Load lbs/kg 937/425 937/425

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,822/1,280 3,042/1,380

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,263/1,480 3,351/1,520

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/li‐ 25.6-59.7/570‐ 25.6-59.7/570-1,


ter 1,450 450

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or


the gross vehicle weight.

314
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Technical data Reference

Capacities

BMW X5 Notes

Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 22.4/85 Fuel specifications, refer to


page 264

Including reserve of

X5 xDrive35i, X5 xDrive35d US gal/liters Approx. 2.1/8

X5 xDrive50i US gal/liters approx. 2.6/10

Window washer system US qt/liters approx. 6.9/6.5 Details, refer to page 73


With headlamp washer sys‐
tem

BMW X6 Notes

Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 22.4/85 Fuel specifications, refer to


page 264

Including reserve of

X6 xDrive35i US gal/liters Approx. 2.1/8

X6 xDrive50i US gal/liters approx. 3.2/12

Window washer system US qt/liters approx. 6.9/6.5 Details, refer to page 73


With headlamp washer sys‐
tem

315
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Reference Short commands for voice activation system

Short commands for voice activation


system
Vehicle equipment To have the available spoken instructions read
out loud: ›Voice commands‹
This chapter describes all series equipment as
The following short commands apply to vehicles
well as country-specific and special equipment
equipped with a voice activation system. They
offered for this model series.Therefore, it also
have no function in vehicles in which only the
describes equipment that may not be found in
mobile phone is operated using the voice.
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems.

General information
Instructions for voice activation system, refer to
page 25.

Adjusting
Vehicle

Function Command

Opens the main menu. ›Main menu‹

Open the options. ›Options‹

Open the settings. ›Settings‹

Settings on the Control Display. ›Control display‹

Open the time and date. ›Time and date‹

Open the language and units. ›Language and units‹

Open the speed limit. ›Speed‹

Open the light. ›Lighting‹

Open the door lock. ›Door locks‹

316
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Short commands for voice activation system Reference

Equipment

Function Command

Open the air conditioning settings. ›Climate‹

Open the Head-up Display. ›head up display‹

Enable the rear. ›Allow rear control‹

Vehicle information
Computer

Function Command

Open the computer. ›Onboard info‹

Open the trip computer. ›Trip computer‹

Vehicle

Function Command

Open the vehicle information. ›Vehicle info‹

Open the vehicle status. ›Vehicle status‹

Navigation
General information

Function Command

Navigation menu. ›Navigation‹

Open the destination entry. ›Enter address‹

Enter the address. ›Enter address‹

Enter the town/city. ›City‹

Enter the country. ›State‹

Enter the postal code. ›Postal Code‹

Open destination guidance. ›Guidance‹

317
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Reference Short commands for voice activation system

Function Command

Start destination guidance. ›Start guidance‹

Terminate destination guidance. ›Stop guidance‹

Open the home address. ›Home address‹

Open the route criteria. ›Route preference‹

Open the route. ›Route information‹

Switch on the spoken instruction. ›Switch on voice instructions‹

Repeat the spoken instruction. ›Repeat voice instructions‹

Switch off the spoken instruction. ›Switch off voice instructions‹

Display the address book. ›Address book‹

Display the most recent destinations. ›Last destinations‹

Open the traffic bulletins. ›Traffic Info‹

Special destinations. ›Points of interest‹

Map

Function Command

Display the map. ›Map‹

Map facing north. ›Map facing north‹

Map facing the direction of travel. ›Map in direction of travel‹

Perspective map. ›Map perspective view‹

Automatic scaling of the map. ›Map with automatic scaling‹

Scale...feet. ›Map scale ... feet‹

Scale...meters. ›Map scale ... meters‹ e.g., map scale


100 meters

Scale...kilometers. ›Map scale ... kilometers‹ e.g., map


scale 5 kilometers

Scale...miles. ›Map scale ... miles‹ e.g., map scale


5 miles

318
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Short commands for voice activation system Reference

Split screen settings

Function Command

Split screen. ›Switch on splitscreen‹

Switch off the split screen. ›Turn off split screen‹

Adjust the split screen. ›Split screen content‹

Split screen, map facing north. ›Split screen map facing north‹

Split screen, current position. ›Split screen current position‹

Split screen, facing the direction of travel. ›Split screen map in direction of
travel‹

Split screen, perspective. ›Split screen perspective‹

Split screen, expanded intersection zoom. ›Splitscreen Exit ramp view‹

Split screen scale...feet. ›Split screen scale ... feet‹ e.g., split
screen scale 100 feet

Split screen scale...meters. ›Split screen scale ... meters‹ e.g., split
screen scale 100 meters

Split screen scale...kilometers. ›Split screen scale ... kilometers‹ e.g.,


split screen scale 5 kilometers

Split screen scale...miles. ›Split screen scale ... miles‹ e.g., split
screen scale 5 miles

Split screen, highlight the traffic situation. ›Split screen, Traffic conditions‹

Split screen, computer. ›Split screen on board info‹

Split screen, trip computer. ›Splitscreen trip computer‹

Split screen, scale automatically. ›Split screen automatic scaling‹

Destination guidance with intermediate destinations

Function Command

Enter a new destination. ›Enter address‹

Trip list. ›Stored trips‹

319
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Reference Short commands for voice activation system

Radio
FM

Function Command

Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... megahertz‹ e.g.,


93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5

Open the radio. ›Radio‹

Open the FM stations. ›F M‹

Open the manual search. ›Manual‹

Select a frequency range. ›Select frequency‹

Open a station. ›Select station‹

AM

Function Command

Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... Kilohertz‹ e.g., fre‐


quency 753 or 753 kilohertz

Open the AM stations. ›A M‹

Open the manual search. ›Manual‹

Satellite radio

Function Command

Open the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio‹

Switch on the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio on‹

Select a satellite radio channel. ›Select satellite radio‹ e.g., satellite


radio channel 2

Stored stations

Function Command

Open the stored stations. ›Presets‹

Choose a stored station. ›Select preset‹

Select a stored station. ›Preset ...‹ e.g., stored station 2

320
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Short commands for voice activation system Reference

CD/multimedia
CD/DVD drive

Function Command

Select a track. ›Track ...‹ e.g., track 5


or
›C D track ...‹ e. g., CD track 5

Play back a CD. ›C D on‹

Select a CD. ›Select C D‹

Select a CD and track. ›C D ... track ...‹ e.g., CD 3 track 5

Open the CD and Multimedia menu. ›C D and multimedia‹

CD and DVD. ›C D‹

Select a DVD. ›D V D ...‹ e.g., DVD 3

Display the entertainment details on a split screen. ›Entertainment details‹

Music collection

Function Command

Search for music, open a menu. ›Music search‹

Open the current playback. ›Current playback‹

Open the music collection. ›Music collection‹

Play back the music collection. ›Music collection on‹

Play back the most frequently played tracks. ›Top fifty‹

External devices

Function Command

Open the external devices. ›External devices‹

Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹

321
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Reference Short commands for voice activation system

Tone

Function Command

Open the tone settings. ›Tone‹

Telephone

Function Command

Dial a phone number. ›Dial number‹

Open the Telephone menu. ›Telephone‹

Display the phone book. ›Phonebook‹

Redialing. ›Redial‹

Display received calls. ›Received calls‹

List of messages. ›Messages‹

Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹

Office

Function Command

Open the Office menu. ›Office‹

Display Office Today. ›Current office‹

Display the contacts. ›Contacts‹

Display the messages. ›Messages‹

Display the calendar. ›Calendar‹

Display the tasks. ›Tasks‹

Display the reminders. ›Reminders‹

322
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Short commands for voice activation system Reference

Contacts

Function Command

Select a name. ›Choose name‹

My contacts. ›My contacts‹

Open the contacts. ›Contacts‹

New contact. ›New contact‹

ConnectedDrive or BMW Assist

Function Command

Open BMW Assist. ›B M W Assist‹

Open ConnectedDrive. ›Connected Drive‹

Open BMW Online. ›B M W Online‹

323
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Reference Everything from A to Z

Everything from A to Z
Index
0-9 Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ Anti-theft protection 32
culated air mode 130 Appointments 247
3rd row seats 50 Air distribution, auto‐ Approved axle loads, refer to
matic 128, 133 Weights 314
A Air distribution, manual 130 Approved engine oils 284
Air drying, refer to Cooling Approved gross vehicle
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ function 130 weight, refer to Weights 314
tem 103 Air flow rate 129 Armrest, refer to Center arm‐
ACC Active Cruise Con‐ Air flow rate, blower, refer to Air rest 144
trol 109 volume 133 Arrival time, refer to Com‐
Access to 3rd row seats 50 Airing, refer to Ventilation 131 puter 80
Accident, refer to Emergency Air pressure, refer to Tire infla‐ Ashtray 139
Request, initiating 300 tion pressure 269 Ashtray, front 139
Acoustic signal, refer to Check Air vents 127 Ashtray, rear 139
Control 83 Air vents, refer to Ventila‐ Assist 253
Activated-charcoal filter 132 tion 131 Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
Active Cruise Control Alarm system 42 tance 301
ACC 109 Alarm system Assistance with driving off, re‐
Active cruise control, indicator – Avoiding unintentional fer to Drive-off assistant 107
lamp 112 alarms 43 Assistance with starting en‐
Active Cruise Control, radar – Ending an alarm 42 gine, refer to Jump-start‐
sensor 113 – Interior motion sensor 43 ing 301
– Tilt alarm sensor 43
Active Cruise Control, select‐ Audio CD with rear DVD sys‐
All around the headliner 17
ing the distance 111 tem 221
All-season tires, refer to Win‐
Active Cruise Control, warning Audio device, external 144
ter tires 279
lamps 113 Audio playback 195
All-wheel drive, refer to
Active seat 53 Audio playback, Blue‐
xDrive 105
Active seat ventilation 52 tooth 210
Alternating-code hand-held
Active steering 108 Automatic, air distribu‐
transmitter 136
Adaptive brake lights, refer to tion 128, 133
AM/FM station 186
Brake force display 102 Automatic air distribution 133
Announcement, navigation,
Adaptive Drive 107 Automatic, air flow rate 128
refer to Spoken instruc‐
Adaptive fixing system 146 Automatic car wash 305
tions 175
Adaptive light control 89 Automatic climate con‐
Antifreeze, coolant 285
Additional telephone 230 trol 127
Antifreeze, washer fluid 73
Additives, coolant 285 Automatic climate control, au‐
Antilock Brake System,
Additives, engine oil 284 tomatic air distribu‐
ABS 103
After washing vehicle 306 tion 128, 133
Anti-slip control, refer to Dy‐
Airbags 93 Automatic climate control, in
namic Stability Control
Airbags, indicator/warning rear 132
DSC 103
light 95

324
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Everything from A to Z Reference

Automatic climate control in Average speed 79 Bluetooth connection, activat‐


rear, activating on Control Average speed, refer to Com‐ ing/deactivating 231
Display 133 puter 79 BMW Advanced Diesel 265
Automatic climate control in Axle loads, refer to BMW Apps 257
rear, air supply 133 Weights 314 BMW Apps, video play‐
Automatic climate control in back 209
rear, deactivating on Control B BMW Assist 253
Display 133 BMW Assist, refer to Connec‐
Automatic climate control in Backrest curvature, refer to tedDrive 253
rear, switching off 133 Lumbar support 49 BMW EfficientDynamics, refer
Automatic climate control, Backrest width 49 to Saving fuel 158
switching off 131, 133 Back seats, adjusting the head BMW Homepage 6
Automatic climate control, restraints 56 BMW Internet page 6
ventilation in rear 132 Backup camera 120 BMW maintenance sys‐
Automatic climate control, Backup camera, cleaning 122 tem 286
with 2-zone control 128 Backup camera, obstacle BMW Online 255
Automatic climate control, marking 121 Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐
with 4-zone control 132 Backup camera, pathway pholder 145
Automatic, cruise control 116 lines 120 Brake assistant 103
Automatic Cruise Control 109 Backup camera, turning Brake discs, breaking in 152
Automatic Curb Monitor 57 lines 121 Brake fluid, refer to Service re‐
Automatic headlamp con‐ Balance 184 quirements 81
trol 88, 89 Band-aids, refer to First aid Brake force display 102
Automatic Hold 69 kit 301 Brake force distribution, elec‐
Automatic Hold, activating 69 Bass 184 tronic 103
Automatic Hold, deactivat‐ Battery Brake lamps, brake force dis‐
ing 69 – Remote control 30 play 102
Automatic Hold, parking 70 Battery change, remote con‐ Brake lights, adaptive 102
Automatic recirculated air trol for rear DVD system 217 Brake pads, breaking in 152
control 130 Battery disposal 298 Brakes, BMW maintenance
Automatic Soft Closing, Battery, refer to Vehicle bat‐ system 286
doors 35 tery 297 Brakes, parking brake 68
Automatic Soft Closing, tail‐ Battery replacement, remote Brakes, service require‐
gate 36 control for vehicle 42 ments 81
Automatic tailgate opera‐ Before entering the car Brake system, BMW mainte‐
tion 37, 38 wash 305 nance system 286
Automatic transmission with Belts, refer to Safety belts 53 Braking, notes 153
Steptronic 74 Belt tensioners, refer to Safety Breakdown assistance 301
Automatic transmission with belts 53 Breakdown, transporting the
Steptronic Beverage holder, refer to Cu‐ vehicle 303
– Kickdown 74 pholder 145 Breaking in 152
AUTO program with automatic Black and white map dis‐ Brightness, on the Control
climate control 128, 133 play 178 Display 86
AUX-IN port 144, 206 Blower, refer to Air flow Bulb replacement, refer to
Average fuel consumption 80 rate 129 Lamp and bulb replace‐
Average fuel consumption, Bluetooth audio 210 ment 288
setting the units 86

325
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Reference Everything from A to Z

Button for starting the engine, Cargo straps, securing Changes, technical, refer to
refer to Start/Stop button 66 cargo 156 Safety 6
Car key, refer to Integrated Changing wheels/tires 279
C key/remote control 30 Chassis number, refer to En‐
Carpet, care 307 gine compartment 281
Calendar 247 Car phone, installation loca‐ Check Control 83
Calibration, driver's seat 54 tion, refer to Center arm‐ Children, transporting 60
California Proposition 65 rest 144 Child restraint fixing system
Warning 7 Car phone, refer to Tele‐ LATCH 61
Camera, care 308 phone 230 Child restraint fixing sys‐
Camera, refer to Backup cam‐ Car vacuum cleaner, connect‐ tems 60
era 120 ing, refer to Connecting elec‐ Child restraint fixing systems,
Camera, Side View 125 trical devices 139 mounting 60
Camera, Top View 124 Car wash 305 Child safety locks 65
Can holder, refer to Cu‐ Catalytic converter, refer to Child seat, mounting 60
pholder 145 Hot exhaust system 153 Child seats, refer to Transport‐
Car battery, refer to Vehicle CBC, refer to Cornering Brake ing children safely 60
battery 297 Control 103 Chrome parts, care 307
Car care products 306 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ Cigarette lighter, connecting
Care 305 ice 286 electrical devices 139
Care, displays 308 CD/DVD 194 Cigarette lighter, refer to
Care, vehicle 306 CD/DVD changer 198 Lighter 139
Cargo 154 CD/DVD in rear 216 Cigarette lighter socket 139
Cargo area CD/DVD notes 200 Circulation of air, refer to Re‐
– Comfort Access 41 CD, refer to Playing audio circulated air mode 130
Cargo area, capacities 314 tracks, rear DVD system 221 Cleaning, displays 308
Cargo area, enlarging 142 CDs, storing 201 Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Cargo area lamp, refer to Inte‐ Cell phone 230 Care 305
rior lamps 92 Cell phone, installation loca‐ Clock 77
Cargo area lid, refer to Tail‐ tion, refer to Center arm‐ Clock, 12h/24h mode 85
gate 36, 38 rest 144 Closing
Cargo area, opening/closing, Center armrest, front 144 – From the inside 35
refer to Lower tailgate 38 Center armrest, rear 144 – From the outside 32
Cargo area, opening/closing, Center brake lamp 292, 295 Clothes hooks 145
refer to Tailgate 36, 38 Center console, refer to Cockpit 12
Cargo area, opening from the Around the center con‐ Cold start, refer to Starting the
inside 36 sole 16 engine 67
Cargo area, opening from the Central locking Combination instrument, refer
outside 36 – Comfort Access 40 to Instrument cluster 14
Cargo area, refer to Cargo – From the inside 35 Combination switch, refer to
area 140 – Setting the unlocking char‐ Turn signal/high beams/
Cargo cover, refer to Luggage acteristics 32 headlamp flasher 71
compartment roller Central locking system Combination switch, refer to
cover 140 – From the outside 32 Washer/wiper system 72
– Principle 32 Comfort Access
Cargo, securing with ski bag,
Central screen, refer to Control – Battery replacement 42
refer to Securing cargo 148
Display 19

326
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 901 891 - 03 12 500
Everything from A to Z Reference

Comfort area, refer to Around Coolant temperature 78 Destination guidance with in‐
the center console 16 Cooling function, switching on termediate destinations 171
Compact wheel, inflation pres‐ and off 130 Destination input, naviga‐
sure 269, 270 Cooling, maximum 130 tion 164
Compartment for remote con‐ Cooling system, refer to Cool‐ Diesel exhaust fluid, at low
trol, refer to Ignition lock 66 ant 285 temperatures 266
Compartments, refer to Stor‐ Cornering Brake Control Diesel exhaust fluid, at mini‐
age compartments 143, 144 CBC 103 mum 266
Compass, digital 137 Corrosion on brake discs 154 Diesel exhaust fluid, having re‐
Computer 79 Courtesy lamps, refer to Inte‐ filled 266
Computer, displaying informa‐ rior lamps 92 Diesel exhaust fluid, refilling
tion 79 Cradle for telephone or mobile yourself 266
Computer, displays on the phone, refer to Snap-in Diesel particulate filter 153
Control Display 80 adapter 240 Digital clock 77
Concierge service 254 Cruise control 116 Digital compass 137
Condensation on windows, re‐ Cruise control Digital radio 187
moving 129 – Malfunction 117 Dimming mirrors 58
Condensation under the vehi‐ Cruise control, active 109 Directional indicators, refer to
cle 154 Cupholder 145 Turn signals 71
Condition Based Service Curb weight, refer to Display in front wind‐
CBS 286 Weights 314 shield 125
Confirmation signals for lock‐ Current fuel consumption 78 Display lighting, refer to Instru‐
ing/unlocking the vehicle 33 Current location, storing 166 ment lighting 92
ConnectedDrive 253 Curve lights, refer to Adaptive Displays and controls 12
Connecting, mobile phone, re‐ light control 89 Displays, care 308
fer to Pairing the m